huawei optix rtn 910 radio transmission system idu hardware description

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission SystemV100R002C00

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 03

Date 2010-01-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 910 V100R002C00

iManager U2000 V100R001C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer

l Installation and commissioning engineer

l Field maintenance engineer

l Data configuration engineer

l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description About This Document


iii

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains allupdates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.

The updated contents are as follows.

Section Description

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card Modifies the sequence of high-order bits andlower-order bits of DIP switches.

3.5.2 Functions and Features Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks onthe IF1 board.

GUI ConventionsOptiX RTN 910


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Section Description

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment Adds descriptions of requirements for thediameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types ofcoaxial connectors, and crimp pliers.

- Fixes known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.

The updated contents are as follows.

Section Description

D Glossary Adds certain terms.

E Acronyms and Abbreviations Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Update History


v

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-11.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-21.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-31.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-22.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-43.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-8

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-93.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-93.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-113.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-133.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-223.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-253.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-253.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-263.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-26

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-303.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-303.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-303.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-333.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-373.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-503.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-533.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-543.4.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-543.4.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-54

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Contents


vii

3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-593.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-603.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-603.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-613.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-663.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-683.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-693.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-69

3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-703.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-713.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-713.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-723.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-763.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-783.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-793.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-79

3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-803.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-813.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-813.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-833.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-873.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-893.7.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-903.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-90

3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-913.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-923.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-923.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-943.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-973.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-1013.8.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-1023.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-1023.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-102

3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-1043.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-1053.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-1053.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-1063.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-1093.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-1113.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-1113.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-1123.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-112

ContentsOptiX RTN 910


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-1133.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1143.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1143.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1153.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1173.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1213.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1223.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-1223.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-122

3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-1233.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1233.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1233.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1243.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1253.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1263.11.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-126

3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-1273.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1273.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1273.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1283.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1293.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1303.12.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-130

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-14.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-44.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-54.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-35.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-45.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-65.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-75.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-95.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-135.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14

5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-16



ix

5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16

A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20

A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45

A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76



x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services......................................................................................................................................................................A-88A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93

A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144

A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation....................................................................................................................................................................A-178A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185



xi

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation....................................................................................................................................................................A-189A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199

A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232

A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243

A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263



xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281

A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1

D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1

E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1



xiii

Figures

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6Figure 1-5 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-11Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-12Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-14Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-16Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-17Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-20Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-23Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-25Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-25Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-34Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-36Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-37Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-38Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-38Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-42Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-43Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-48Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-51Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-53Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-53Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-53Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-54Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-62

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Figures


xv

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-68Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-68Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-73Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-76Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-78Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-79Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-83Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-87Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-89Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-90Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-95Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-97Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-97Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-99Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-101Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-101Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-107Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-109Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-111Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-111Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-115Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-117Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-117Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-121Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-121Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-124Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-125Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-126Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-126Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-128Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-129Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-130Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-130Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3

FiguresOptiX RTN 910


xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Figures


xvii

Tables

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-14Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-15Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-16Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-16Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-17Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface........................................................................................3-18Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface................................................................................................3-19Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface..................................................................................3-19Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-19Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-20Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-21Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-23Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-26Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-26Table 3-16 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-27Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-27Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-28Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-28Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-29Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-29Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-29Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-38Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-39Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................ 3-41Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-42Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-42Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-43

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Tables


xix

Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-44Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-45Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-45Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-45Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-46Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-46Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-47Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-47Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-48Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-51Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-54Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-55Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-55Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-56Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-56Table 3-44 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-57Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-57Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-57Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-58Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-58Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-58Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-59Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-62Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-65Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-66Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-67Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-69Table 3-56 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-69Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-70Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-70Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-73Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-75Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-76Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-78Table 3-63 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-79Table 3-64 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-79Table 3-65 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-80Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-80Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-84Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-86Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-87Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-89

TablesOptiX RTN 910


xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-71 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-90Table 3-72 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-90Table 3-73 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-91Table 3-74 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-91Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction............................................................................... 3-95Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-96Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................... 3-97Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-99Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-99Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-100Table 3-81 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-101Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-101Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-102Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-102Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-104Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-107Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-108Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.....................................................................................3-109Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces .........................................................................................................3-110Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D..........................................................................................................3-111Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D.....................................................................................................3-112Table 3-94 STM-1 optical interface performance............................................................................................3-112Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-113Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................3-115Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-116Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................3-118Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S.......................................................................................3-118Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D...................................................................................3-118Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-122Table 3-104 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-122Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-123Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-125Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-126Table 3-108 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-127Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-129Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-130Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-131Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description Tables


xxi

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-9Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-11Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11

TablesOptiX RTN 910


xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

1 Introduction

About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmissionsystem.

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed byHuawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communicationnetwork or private network.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, andthe antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.

1.3 Configuration ModesThe OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring differentcontrol, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of differentmicrowave application scenarios.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction


1-1

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed byHuawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communicationnetwork or private network.

The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of theOptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriatetype based on the actual requirements.

The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation andflexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports thesmooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybridmicrowave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes thatoccur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmissionrequirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.

Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybridmicrowave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for themobile communication network.

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

OptiX RTN 910 BTS BSC

E1

E1

E1

STM-1/E1 E1Regional BackhaulNetwork

E1 E1

E1

E1

E1E1

1 IntroductionOptiX RTN 910


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

Regional backhaulnetwork

OptiX RTN 910 BTSNodeB BSCRNC

FEE1

FEE1

E1

E1FE

FE/GE

E1

GE

E1

E1

STM-1/E1

FE

NOTE

l In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNCor the BSC directly.

l When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NEcascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, andthe antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 910

The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performsmultiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control andcommunication function.

Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910

Item Performance

Chassis height 1U

Pluggable Supported

Number of microwavedirections

1-2



1-3

Item Performance

RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration2+0 non-protection configuration1+1 protection configurationN+1 protection configuration (N = 1)XPIC configuration

Figure 1-3 IDU 910

ODUThe ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion andamplification of signals.

The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

ODU type SP, SPA HP LP

Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz (SPODU)6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/32/38 GHz

7/8/11/13/15/18/23GHz




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

Microwavemodulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM(SP)QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM (SPA)

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910

Item Description

High Power ODU

ODU type XMC-2

Frequency band 15/23 GHz

Microwave modulation mode QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz

AntennaThe OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and thecorresponding feeder system.

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separatemounting.

l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, theODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for oneantenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) mustbe mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mountingmethod.



1-5

Figure 1-4 Direct mounting

l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameterand single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In thissituation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.

Figure 1-5 Separate mounting

1.3 Configuration ModesThe OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring differentcontrol, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of differentmicrowave application scenarios.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910

ConfigurationModes

Type of theControl,Switching,and TimingBoard

Type of the IFBoard

Type of theODU

MainApplication

PDHmicrowaveequipment

CSTA IF1 Low capacityfor PDH ODU

Providing aradio link whosecapacity is nothigher than16xE1

SDHmicrowaveequipment

CSTA IF1 Standard powerODU or highpower ODU

Providing anSTM-1 radiolink or a high-capacity PDHradio link

Hybridmicrowaveequipment

CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

IFU2 Standard powerODU or highpower ODU

Providing aHybrid radiolink

XPIC Hybridmicrowaveequipment

CSHA/CSHB/CSHC

IFX2 Standard powerODU or highpower ODU

Providing aHybrid radiolink of the supercapacity



1-7

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU of OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and thereforecan be deployed flexibly.

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). TheIDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.

2.3 IDU LabelsThere are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiarwith the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis


2-1

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). TheIDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.

Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.

Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.

The IDU 910 can be installed:l In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet

l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In an open rack

l On a wall

l On a table

2.3 IDU LabelsThere are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiarwith the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 910



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Label DescriptionTable 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDUchassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis andboards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description

ESD protectionlabel

Indicates that theequipment issensitive to staticelectricity.

Grounding label Indicates thegrounding positionof the IDU chassis.

Fan warninglabel

warns you not totouch the fan leaveswhen the fan isrotating.

Hightemperaturewarning label

The board surfacetemperature mayexceed 70°C whenthe ambienttemperature ishigher than 55°C. Inthis case, you needto wear protectivegloves beforehandling the board.

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Qualificationcard label

Indicates that theequipment isqualified.

RoHS label Indicates that theequipmentcomplies with therelatedrequirementsspecified in theRoHS directive.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis


2-3

Label Label Name Description

Productnameplate label

Indicates theproduct name andcertification.

PULL

Operationguidance label

The switch levermust be pulledoutwards slightlybefore setting theswitch to the "I" or"O" position.

Label PositionFigure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.

Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

OptiX RTN 910

华为技术有限公司中国制造

电源额定值

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO .,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

N 14036

Class 1 Laser Product

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48－-60V;5A

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 910



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timingboard, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.

3.1 Board AppearanceThe dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connectunit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm(width).

3.2 Board ListThe boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housingdifferent types of boards.

3.3 CSTAThe CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHCThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are withregard to the types and number of service interfaces.

3.5 IF1The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A andIF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only differencefrom the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distributionmodes.

3.6 IFU2The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission andPacket microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I powerdistribution mode.

3.7 IFX2The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwaveand Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8 EM6T/EM6F

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards


3-1

The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces andtwo GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is asfollows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GEinterfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical orelectrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatiblewith the FE electrical interfaces.

3.9 SL1DThe SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.10 SP3S/SP3DThe SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohmtributary board.

3.11 PIUThe PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

3.12 FANThe FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 910



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3.1 Board AppearanceThe dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connectunit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm(width).

NOTEThe depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis.

Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)

The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has twoejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted orremoved. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attachedto one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.

Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code

②

Internal code

③④

Board versionBoard nameBoard feature code

①

0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01① ② ③ ④



3-3

NOTEThe indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interfaceboard indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface boardindicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see thedescription of each board in this document.

3.2 Board ListThe boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housingdifferent types of boards.

Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout

Slot6

(FAN)

Slot5

(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)

Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

NOTE

The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.

Table 3-1 List of IDUs

BoardName

FullSpelling Valid Slot Description

CSTA TDMcontrol,switching,and timingboard

Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connectionsfor VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalentto 8x8 VC-4s.

l Performs system communication andcontrol.

l Provides the clock processing function andsupports one external clock input/outputfunction.

l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1interfaces.

l Uses the SFP module to provide twoSTM-1 optical interfaces.

l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, oneNM serial interface, and one NE cascadinginterface.

l Provides one orderwire interface, oneasynchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarminterfaces.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

BoardName


CSHA Hybridcontrol,switching,and timingboard


l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switchingcapability.




l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.

l Provides two GE electrical interfaces thatare compatible with the FE electricalinterface.





3-5

BoardName


CSHB Hybridcontrol,switching,and timingboard





l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohmE1 interfaces.








Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

BoardName


CSHC Hybridcontrol,switching,and timingboard






l Uses the SFP module to provide twoSTM-1 optical interfaces.


l Uses the SFP module to provide two GEoptical or electrical interfaces. The GEelectrical interfaces are compatible withthe FE electrical interfaces.



IF1 SDH IFboard

Slot 3 or slot4

l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports the TU-based PDH microwavesolution and the STM-1-based SDHmicrowave solution.

IFU2 Universal IFboard

Slot 3 or slot4


l Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.

l Supports AM.

IFX2 UniversalXPIC IFboard

Slot 3 or slot4


l Supports the XPIC function of the Hybridmicrowave.

l Supports the AM of the Hybridmicrowave.

SL1D 2xSTM-1interfaceboard

Slot 3 or slot4

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1optical interfaces.



3-7

BoardName


EM6T 6 Port RJ45Ethernet/GigabitEthernetInterfaceBoard

Slot 3 or slot4

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.


EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +2 Port SFPFastEthernet/GigabitEthernetInterfaceBoard

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

l Uses the SFP module to provide two GEoptical or electrical interfaces. The GEelectrical interfaces are compatible withthe FE electrical interfaces.

SP3S 16xE1tributaryboard

Slot 3 or slot4

Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1interfaces.

SP3D 32xE1tributaryboard

Slot 3 or slot4

Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1interfaces.

TNC1PIU Power board Slot 5 Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.

TNC1FAN Fan board Slot 6 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSTAThe CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.

3.3.3 Working PrincipleThe CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,and labels on the front panel.

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3.3.6 Valid SlotsThe CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinaryslots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are alsoallocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional uniton the CSTA.

3.3.7 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the barcode. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

3.3.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

3.3.9 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDHoptical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.

Time Division Cross-Connection

l Grooms service signals between boards.

l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, whichare equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

System Control and Communicationl Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and

the ODUs by using the NE software.

l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control andcommunication unit.

l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.

l Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and processes a maximum of seven DCCs.

l Cross-connects and processes overheads.

Clock Processingl Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service

signals and overhead signals for the other boards.

l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.



3-9

l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be thesystem clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwaveinterface line clock, or tributary clock.

l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.

l Supports the detection of the states of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.

l Supports the locked, holdover, and free-run modes.

Service Interfacesl Provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 service interfaces.

l Adopts the SFP optical modules and can provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.

Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfacesl Provides one Ethernet NM interface.

l Provides one NM serial interface.

l Provides one NE cascade interface.

l Provides one Orderwire interface.

l Provides one asynchronous data interface.

l Provides one synchronous data interface.

l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.

Protection Processingl Performs the 1+1 protection switching.

l Performs the linear MSP switching.

l Performs the SNCP switching.

l Performs the clock protection switching.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Reports various alarms and performance events.

l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performancethresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTE

For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.

l Supports the outloop in VC-4 paths.

l Supports the board reset.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the-48 V power supply.

l Checks the indicators on all the boards.

l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.

l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.

l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading preventionfunction.

l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. Thebackup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-site board replacement.

3.3.3 Working PrincipleThe CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA

Backplane

System control and

communication unit

Cross-connect unit

External alarm interface

Clock unit Clock signal provided to other boards

External clock signalClock interface

STM-1 signal

processing unit

E1 signal processing

unit

VC-4 signal

VC-4 signal

E1 signal

SDH signal

Control bus

VC-4 signal

Asynchronous data interfaceSynchronous data interface

Orderwire interface

Auxiliary interface

unit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

NM interfaceNM serial interface

NE cascade interface

Clock source received from the service unit on the board

Power supply

unit

-48 V1-48 V2

Supplies power to the other units on the board

+12 V power supplied to the fans

+3.3 V power supplied to other boards

Clock signal received from other boards

TDM service board



3-11

System Control and Communication UnitThe system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. Thesystem control and communication unit performs the following functions:

l Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms andperformance events through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through thecontrol bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board.

l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.

l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NEcascade interface.

l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads thesoftware.

l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loadsthe FPGA software.

l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPUunit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.

– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.

– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes betweendifferent lines.

Cross-Connect UnitThe cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional blockdiagram of the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDMservice unit

HOXC

LOXC

Sink TDMservice unit




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unitthrough the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connectunit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. Ifthe VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unitgrooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to thehigher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services andthen transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electricalsignals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as thesignal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and SignalFlow of the SP3S/SP3D.

STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clocksignal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processespointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as thesignal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and SignalFlow of the SL1D.

Clock Unit

The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a serviceinterface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit providesthe system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units onthe system control and communication board and the other boards.

Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required bythe chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.

l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power requiredby the other boards in the IDU.

l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required bythe fan.




3-13

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA

CS

TAS

TAT

PR

OG

SY

NC

SR

V

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONEE1

1~16LOS

1LO

S2

1 2 3 4 5

1 2

STM-1

1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Auxiliary interfaces andmanagement interfaces

4. STM-1 optical interfaces 5. E1 (1-16) interface

Indicators

Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l There is no power supplied to theboard.

PROG On for 100 ms (green) andoff for 100 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the software is being loadedto the flash memory.

On for 300 ms (green) andoff for 300 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the board software is inBIOS boot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is beinginitialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and offfor 100 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is being powered orbeing reset, the memory self-check failsor loading upper layer software fails.When the board is running, the logic fileor upper layer software is lost.The pluggable storage card is faulty.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Off The software is running normally.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.

SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on theboard.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in thesystem.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface on the linereports the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface on the line doesnot report the R_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface on the linereports the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interface on the linedoes not report the R_LOS alarm.

Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type

NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface

RJ-45

EXT NE cascade interface

CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface

F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface

ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface

PHONE Orderwire interface

CF RCV CF configuration reset button -

RST Board warm reset button -



3-15

NOTE

l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface cantransparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data serviceoverhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clockinterface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.

l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparenttransmission of the orderwire byte.

The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignmentsof the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.

Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface

Interface Pin Signal

NMS/COM

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

4 Grounding end of the NM serialinterface

5 Receive end of the NM serial interface

6 Receiving data (-)

7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serialinterface

Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface


EXT







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTEThe EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit datathrough pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, seeTable 3-6.

Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector


LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The interface is not transmitting orreceiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that noexternal Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performedon the NEs.

Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface

CS

TAS

TAT

PR

OG

SY

NC

SR

V


1~16CR

ITM

AJ

MIN

MA

JLO

S1

LOS

2

CS

TAS

TAT

PR

OG

SY

NC

SR

V


1~16CR

ITM

AJ

MIN

MA

JLO

S1

LOS

2

LAN

The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of thesame RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is providedin Table 3-7.



3-17

NOTEPins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are notused in this product version.

Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode

External Clock

ExternalTime Input(1 PPS +TimeInformation)

External TimeOutput(1 PPS + TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input(DCLS)

External TimeOutput(DCLS)

1 CLKreceiving (-)

Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

2 CLKreceiving (+)


3 Notdefined

1 PPS signalinput (-)(RS-422level)

1 PPS signaloutput (-)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal input (-)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal output (-)(RS-422 level)

4 CLKtransmitting (-)

Groundingend

Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

5 CLKtransmitting (+)

Groundingend


6 Notdefined

1 PPS signalinput (+)(RS-422level)

1 PPS signaloutput (+)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal input (+)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal output (+)(RS-422 level)

7 Notdefined

Timeinformationinput (-)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (-)(RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined

8 Notdefined

Timeinformationinput (+)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (+)(RS-422 level)





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface


F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-9.

Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface


ALMI/ALMO

1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

7 The first external alarm output signal (+)

8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-10.

Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface


PHONE 1 Not defined

2



3-19


3

4 RING

5 TIP

6 Not defined

7

8

Service Interfaces

Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA


TX1 Transmit port of the firstSTM-1 optical interface

LC (the SFP optical module)

RX1 Receive port of the firstSTM-1 optical interface

TX2 Transmit port of the secondSTM-1 optical interface


RX2 Receive port of the secondSTM-1 optical interface

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1signals

Anea 96

The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96interface is provided in Figure 3-9 and Table 3-12.

Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

POS.96

POS.1




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 The first received E1differential signal (+)

25 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

2 The first received E1differential signal (-)

26 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

3 The second received E1differential signal (+)

27 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

4 The second received E1differential signal (-)

28 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

5 The third received E1differential signal (+)

29 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

6 The third received E1differential signal (-)

30 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

7 The fourth received E1differential signal (+)

31 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

8 The fourth received E1differential signal (-)

32 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

9 The fifth received E1differential signal (+)

33 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

10 The fifth received E1differential signal (-)

34 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

11 The sixth received E1differential signal (+)

35 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

12 The sixth received E1differential signal (-)

36 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

13 The seventh received E1differential signal (+)

37 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

14 The seventh received E1differential signal (-)

38 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

15 The eighth received E1differential signal (+)

39 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

16 The eighth received E1differential signal (-)

40 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

17 The ninth received E1differential signal (+)

41 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

18 The ninth received E1differential signal (-)

42 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)



3-21


19 The tenth received E1differential signal (+)

43 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

20 The tenth received E1differential signal (-)

44 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1differential signal (+)

45 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

22 The eleventh received E1differential signal (-)

46 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

23 The twelfth received E1differential signal (+)

47 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

24 The twelfth received E1differential signal (-)

48 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

49 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (+)

73 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

50 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (-)

74 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

51 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (+)

75 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

52 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (-)

76 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

53 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (+)

77 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

54 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (-)

78 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

55 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (+)

79 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

56 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (-)

80 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)


The CF card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

l All the FPGA files

l License file for microwave link capability




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

O

ND

IP

12

34

2

1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches

Setting the DIP Switchesa Function

1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Normaloperating statewhen thewatchdog isenabled.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Memory self-check state.

0 0 1 1 Commissioningstate.

0 1 0 0 Operating statewhen thewatchdog isdisabled and thefull memorycheck isperformed.



3-23


1 2 3 4

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdoverstate.

0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibitionstate.

0 1 1 1 Reserved (bydefault,operating statewhen thewatchdog isstarted).


1 0 0 1 To recover thedata of the CFcard.

1 0 1 0 To erase the datain the systemparameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erase thedatabases.

1 1 0 0 To erase the NEsoftware,including thepatches.

1 1 0 1 To erase thedatabases andNE software(including thepatches).

1 1 1 0 To format thefile system, thatis, to erase allthe data in thefile system.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


1 2 3 4

1 1 1 1 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased (filesystem +extended BIOS+ systemparameter area).

NOTEa: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch isturned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.

3.3.6 Valid SlotsThe CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinaryslots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are alsoallocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional uniton the CSTA.

Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA)


According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control andcommunication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logicalservice boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.

Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1 (CSTA)


Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.3.7 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the barcode. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.



3-25

Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (Ohm)

A 120

B 75

3.3.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

Related ReferencesA.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingA.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableA.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusA.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralA.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortA.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortA.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

3.3.9 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDHoptical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Cross-Connection Performance

Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which areequivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.

Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Item Performance

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFPmodules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-16 E1 interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call


One symmetrical wire pair



3-27

Item Performance

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTNequipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwirephones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call isestablished.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in theITU-T Recommendations.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronizationsource

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-outranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response andholdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of themicrowave frame.


Impedance (ohm) 120

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm(width)

Weight 1.08 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 13.6W



3-29

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHCThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are withregard to the types and number of service interfaces.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, theCSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, andmanagement interfaces.

3.4.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packetswitching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.



3.4.6 Valid SlotsThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space oftwo ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logicalboards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMSso that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

3.4.7 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board featurecode of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the boardname.

3.4.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

3.4.9 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, andmanagement interfaces.

Packet Switchingl Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services.

l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags andforwards packets based on the VLAN tags.

l Supports the MAC address learning function.

l Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree(CIST).

l Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol.

l Supports the QoS function.

l Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection.

l Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when afault occurs on the transmission network.

l Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) andtwo load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm isbased on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address.

l Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

l Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262.

Time Division Cross-Connection

l Grooms service signals between boards.

l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, whichare equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

System Control and Communicationl Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and

the ODUs by using the NE software.

l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control andcommunication unit.

l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.

l Realizes the communication with the NMS and other NEs. The CSHC can process amaximum of seven DCCs. The CSHA and CSHB can provide up to 5 DCC channels.

l Cross-connects and processes overheads.

Clock Processingl Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service

signals and overhead signals for the other boards.

l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.



3-31

l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be thesystem clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwaveinterface line clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or tributary clock.

l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.

l Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.

l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.

TDM Service Processing Interfacesl The CSHA provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.

l The CSHB provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.

l The CSHC supports sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces and two STM-1 opticalinterfaces. The two STM-1 optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.

Ethernet Service Interfacesl The CSHA provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two

GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.l The CSHB provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two

GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.l The CSHC provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE optical interfaces. The two

GE optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.l The Ethernet interfaces support the auto-negotiation and self-loop diagnosis functions.

l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The followingthree TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The tag attributes of anEthernet interface can be set only when the network attributes of the Ethernet interface isset to UNI.

l Supports the IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control function.

Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfacesl Provides one Ethernet NM interface.

l Provides one NM serial interface.

l Provides one NE cascade interface.

l Provides one Orderwire interface.

l Provides one asynchronous data interface.

l Provides one synchronous data interface.

l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.

Protection Processingl Performs the 1+1 protection switching.

l Performs the linear MSP switching.

l Performs the SNCP switching.

l Performs the clock protection switching.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm thresholds.


l Supports RMON performance events.

NOTE

For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet interfaces.

l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet interfaces.

l Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.

l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.

l Supports the board reset.

l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the-48 V power supply.

l Checks the indicators on all the boards.

l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.


l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading preventionfunction.

l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. Thebackup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-site board replacement.

3.4.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packetswitching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

NOTEThis topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.



3-33


Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram

Backplane

System control and

communication unit

Cross-connect unit

Power supply

unit

External alarm interface

Clock unitClock signal provided to the other boards

External clock signalClock interface

STM-1 signal

processing unit

E1 signal processing

unit

VC-4 signal

VC-4 signal

E1 signal

Control bus

VC-4 signal

Asynchronous data interface

Synchronous data interface

Orderwire interface

Auxiliary interface

unit

-48 V1-48 V2

Power supplied to the other units on the board

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

+12 V power supplied to the fans

+3.3 V power supplied to other boards

NM interfaceNM serial interface

NE cascade interface

Packet switching unit

FE signal access unit

GE signal access unit

FE signal

GE signal

GE bus

FE signal

GE signal

Clock signal received from other boards

Clock signal received from the service unit on the board

TDM service board

Ethernet service board

System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. Thesystem control and communication unit performs the following functions:

l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through thecontrol bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

l The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, throughthe control bus.

l The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,through the control bus.

l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.

l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NEcascade interface.

l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads thesoftware.

l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loadsthe FPGA software.

l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPUunit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.

– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.

– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes betweendifferent lines.

Packet Switching UnitThe main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.

l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or fromother Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on theconfigurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.

l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from otherEthernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the systemcontrol and communication unit for processing. The system control and communicationunit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packetswitching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernetinterface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.

Cross-Connect UnitThe cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-14 shows the functional blockdiagram of the cross-connect unit.



3-35

Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDMservice unit

HOXC

LOXC

Sink TDMservice unit

The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unitthrough the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connectunit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. Ifthe VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unitgrooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to thehigher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services andthen transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

FE Signal Access Unit

The FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switchingunit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.

l In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals bydelimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernetperformance statistics.

l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating theCRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal accessunit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits theFE signals to the FE interface.

GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signalsand works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.

l In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, andserial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring,decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal accessunit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles andperforms the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating theCRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal accessunit performs the parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits the GE signalsto the GE interface after performing O/E conversion.

E1 Signal Processing UnitThe E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electricalsignals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as thesignal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and SignalFlow of the SP3S/SP3D.

STM-1 Signal Processing UnitThe STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clocksignal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processespointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as thesignal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and SignalFlow of the SL1D.

Clock UnitThe clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a serviceinterface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit providesthe system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units onthe system control and communication board and the other boards.

Auxiliary Interface UnitThe auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.

Power Supply UnitThe power supply unit performs the following functions:l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by

the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required

by the other boards in the IDU.l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by

the fan.


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA

CS

HA

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2E1

1~16

1 2 3 4 5 6



3-37


4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-16) interface

Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB

CS

HB

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV


1~16E1

17~32

1 2 3 4 5 6


4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-32) interface

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC

CS

HC

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV

CF RCV RSTNMS/COM NE CLK/TIME F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2

E1(1~16)

ETH STM-1LIN

K1

AC

T1LI

NK

2A

CT2

LOS

1LO

S2

CS

HC

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV

CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2

E11~16

LIN

K1

AC

T1LI

NK

2A

CT2

LOS

1LO

S2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GE STM-1

GE1 GE2 STM-1

2121


4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. STM-1 optical interfaces

7. E1 (1-16) interface

Indicators

Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




















Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC






3-39




















LINK1 On (green) The port connection is normal.

Off The port connection is interrupted.

ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) The data is being transmitted or received.

Off No data is being transmitted or received.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)








Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces


NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface

RJ-45

EXT NE cascade interface

CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface

F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface

ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface

PHONE Orderwire interface

CF RCV CF configuration reset button -

RST Board warm reset button -

NOTE

l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface cantransparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data serviceoverhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clockinterface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.

l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparenttransmission of the orderwire byte.

The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignmentsof the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-18 shows the front view of the RJ-45connector.



3-41


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface


NMS/COM




4 Grounding end of the NM serialinterface

5 Receive end of the NM serial interface


7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serialinterface

Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface


EXT





4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTEThe EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit datathrough pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, seeTable 3-28.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




Off The link fails.



NOTE

The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that noexternal Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performedon the NEs.

Figure 3-19 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface

CS

HA

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV


1~16

CS

HA

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV


1~16

LAN

The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of thesame RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is providedin Table 3-29.

NOTEPins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are notused in this product version.



3-43

Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode

External Clock

ExternalTime Input(1 PPS +TimeInformation)

External TimeOutput(1 PPS + TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input(DCLS)

External TimeOutput(DCLS)

1 CLKreceiving (-)


2 CLKreceiving (+)


3 Notdefined

1 PPS signalinput (-)(RS-422level)

1 PPS signaloutput (-)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal input (-)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal output (-)(RS-422 level)

4 CLKtransmitting (-)

Groundingend


5 CLKtransmitting (+)

Groundingend


6 Notdefined

1 PPS signalinput (+)(RS-422level)

1 PPS signaloutput (+)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal input (+)(RS-422 level)

DCLS timesignal output (+)(RS-422 level)

7 Notdefined

Timeinformationinput (-)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (-)(RS-422 level)


8 Notdefined

Timeinformationinput (+)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (+)(RS-422 level)


The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-30.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface


F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-31.

Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface


ALMI/ALMO

1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal

7 The first external alarm output signal (+)

8 The first external alarm output signal (-)

The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-32.

Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface


PHONE 1 Not defined

2

3

4 RING



3-45


5 TIP

6 Not defined

7

8

Service Interfaces

Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB


FE1 FE interface

RJ-45FE2

GE1 GE electrical interface

GE2

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signalinterfaces

Anea 96

E1 (17-32) The seventeenth to thirty-secondE1 signal interfaces a

NOTEa. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.

Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC


FE1 FE interface RJ-45

FE2

GE1 GE optical interface LC (the SFP optical module)

GE2

TX1 Transmit port of the first STM-1optical interface


RX1 Receive port of the first STM-1optical interface

TX2 Transmit port of the second STM-1optical interface





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


RX2 Receive port of the second STM-1optical interface

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signals Anea 96

The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiationmodes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-35 and Table 3-36.

Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode







3-47









The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as themeanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector).

The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96interface is provided in Figure 3-20 and Table 3-37.


POS.96

POS.1












Issue 03 (2010-01-30)










































3-49























The CF card stores the following information:l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

l All the FPGA files

l License file for microwave link capability




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

O

ND

IP

12

34

2

1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches


1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Normaloperating statewhen thewatchdog isenabled.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Memory self-check state.

0 0 1 1 Commissioningstate.

0 1 0 0 Operating statewhen thewatchdog isdisabled and thefull memorycheck isperformed.



3-51


1 2 3 4

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdoverstate.

0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibitionstate.



1 0 0 1 To recover thedata of the CFcard.

1 0 1 0 To erase the datain the systemparameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erase thedatabases.

1 1 0 0 To erase the NEsoftware,including thepatches.

1 1 0 1 To erase thedatabases andNE software(including thepatches).

1 1 1 0 To format thefile system, thatis, to erase allthe data in thefile system.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


1 2 3 4

1 1 1 1 To format thefile system sothat all the datais erased (filesystem +extended BIOS+ systemparameter area).

NOTEa: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch isturned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.

3.4.6 Valid SlotsThe CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space oftwo ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logicalboards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMSso that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)


Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS.

Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU)


Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S)Slot 1 (CSHA) Slot 10 (AUX)

Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot1 (CSHB )


Slot 10( AUX) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)



3-53

Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot1 (CSHC )


Slot 10( AUX) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.4.7 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board featurecode of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the boardname.

Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC


A 120

B 75

3.4.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Related ReferencesA.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingA.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableA.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusA.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralA.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortA.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortA.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

3.4.9 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching

Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Cross-Connection Performance

Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which areequivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.

Ethernet Interface Performance

The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. Thefollowing three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electricalinterfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.

Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance


Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode opticalfiber

Single-mode opticalfiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFPmodules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45



3-55

Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)


STM-1 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.


Item Performance




Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber


2 15 40 80


1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580


-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0


-30 -28 -34 -34



10 8.2 10 10

NOTE





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3




Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call


One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTNequipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwirephones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call isestablished.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.



3-57

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in theITU-T Recommendations.

Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronizationsource

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-outranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response andholdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of themicrowave frame.


Impedance (ohm) 120




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight CSHA: 1.11 kgCSHB: 1.16 kgCSHC: 1.13 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W

Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W

Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W

3.5 IF1The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A andIF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only differencefrom the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distributionmodes.

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODUand supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF1.

3.5.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be thesame as the physical slots.

3.5.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

3.5.7 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performanceof the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.



3-59

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODUand supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

IF Processingl Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals.

l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwavesignals.

l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode.In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead valuesare not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, theoverhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processingl Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




NOTE


Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.

l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.

l Supports the detection of the board temperature.

l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.

l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.


l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System MaintenanceGuide.

l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unitbut does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the systemcontrol and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA isreloaded), and a service interruption.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF1.



3-61


Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane

Cross-connect unitI F I F

processing unit

Logic processing unit

System control and communication unit


MU

X/D

EM

UX

unitMODEM

unit

Com

biner interface

unit

Power supply

unit

SMODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit


ODU control signal

Paired board

Microwave frame signal

HSM switching signal

Service bus

Overhead bus

Control bus

-48 V

+3.3 V+3.3 power supplied

to the monitoring circuit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3 V power supplied to other modules on the

board

System clock signalClock signal provided to the other units on

the board

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1

Step Functional Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Separates the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interfaceof the CPU unit in the system control andcommunication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theautomatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports the SSM status to the system control andcommunication unit.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports the changes to the systemcontrol and communication unit through the controlbus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, andK bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, andtransmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/soverhead signal to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks the higher order path overheads and generatesthe corresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.



3-63


MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.


l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytesfrom the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/soverhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overheadsignal to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the TU pointers.

l Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals intothe specified position in the VC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/soverhead signal to the system control andcommunication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signaloccupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overheadbandwidth.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUXunit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality forsubsequent processing.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1




l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2Mbit/s overhead signals.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the cross-connect unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Sets the higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets the multiplex section overheads.

l Sets the regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the system control and communication unit.


Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits thecombined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the boardthrough the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the systemcontrol and communication unit.

Power Supply unitl Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 Vpower to the ODU.



3-65

l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock UnitThis unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clocksignal to the other units on the board.

3.5.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1

PULL

IF1 IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TS

RV

LIN

KO

DU

RM

TA

CT

WARNING-48V OUTPUTTURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

IF1

Indicators

Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1


STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.




l There is no power suppliedto the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) Indicates that a critical ormajor alarm occurs in theservice.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The space link is normal.

On (red) The space link is faulty.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.

On (red) l The logical board is notadded on the NMS

l The ODU has critical ormajor alarms.

l No power is supplied.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On for 300 ms (yellow) andoff for 300 ms repeatedly

The antennas are not aligned.

RMT On (yellow) The equipment at theopposite end reports an RDI.

Off The equipment at theopposite end does not reportan RDI.

ACT On (green) l The board is in the activestate in the 1+1 protectionsystem.

l The board is alreadyactivated in theunprotected system.

Off l The board is in the standbystate in the 1+1 protectionsystem.

l The board is not activatedin the unprotected system.

Interfaces

Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type CorrespondingCable

IF IF interface TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -



3-67

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need tofirst pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit isopen. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumperis not required.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protectivegloves before handling the board.

The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch beforeremoving the IF cable.

The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly beforesetting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be thesame as the physical slots.

Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slotnumber of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus20.

Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 10 SLOT 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-55 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slot 3 > slot 4

3.5.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related ReferencesA.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.5.7 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performanceof the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

IF Performance

Table 3-56 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10



3-69

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding forSDH microwave signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.72 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 12 W

3.6 IFU2The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission andPacket microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I powerdistribution mode.

NOTE

In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channelto the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

3.6.4 Front Panel




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsThe IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

3.6.6 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

3.6.7 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channelto the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

IF Processingl Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or

Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.

l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.

l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.





l Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulationmode of 256QAM.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.




l Supports N+1 protection.

NOTE

For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.



3-71




NOTE




l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.

l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.


l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.

l Supports the detection of the board voltage.

l Supports the detection of the board clock.




NOTE



3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

NOTE

The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the workingprinciple and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to theframe structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit orreceive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2Backplane

Cross-connect unit

I F I F processing

unit




MU

X/D

EM

UX

unitMODEM

unit

Com

biner interface

unit

Power supply

unit

SMODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board



Service bus

Overhead bus

GE busPacket switching unit

Control bus

-48V2

-48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board

System clock signalClock signal provided to the other units on the board

Ethernet processin

g unit

+3.3 V

-48 V1

+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit



Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2

Step FunctionalModule

Processing Flow




l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system controland communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters the signal.

l Performs the ADC sampling.

l Performs A/D conversion.



3-73


Processing Flow

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.



5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.




l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, andSSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, andtransmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave servicesignals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and thentransmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybridmicrowave service signals to the ethernet processingunit.

6 Ethernet processingunit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/DEMUX unit.

l Sends the processed signals to the packet switchingunit.




l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standbycross-connect units.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE



Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2


Processing Flow






l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.

l Processes the GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, andmicrowave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.






l Amplifies the signals.




Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the boardthrough the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.



3-75


Power Supply Unitl This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to theODU.

l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performsthe start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power tothe other units on the IFU2.


3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2

IFU

2

PULL

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TS

RV

LIN

KO

DU

RM

TA

CT

WARNING-48V OUTPUTTURN OFF POWERBEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

Indicators

Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2












Issue 03 (2010-01-30)





















3-77

Interface and Switch

Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces




NOTE



Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.




3.6.5 Valid SlotsThe IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)


Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9


Item Description


3.6.6 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related ReferencesA.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM ConfigurationA.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.6.7 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

IF Performance


Item Performance

IF signal


350



3-79

Item Performance


140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10



Item Performance

Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.


Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)

Weight 0.79 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption : < 23 W

3.7 IFX2The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwaveand Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE

In this version, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channelto the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels onthe front panel.

3.7.5 Valid SlotThe IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

3.7.6 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

3.7.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channelto the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal.

IF Processingl Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports

the manual configuration of the XPIC function.l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or

Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.

l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.

l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.






3-81


l Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulationmode of 256QAM.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.




l Supports N+1 protection.

NOTE

For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.




NOTE




l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.

l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.


l Supports the detection of the board voltage.

l Supports the detection of the board clock.







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE



3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

NOTE

The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the workingprinciple and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to theframe structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit orreceive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.


Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane

Cross -connect unit

I IF processing

unit

Logic processing unit System control and

communication unit


MU

X/DEM

UX

unit

MODEM unit

Com

biner interface

unit

Power supply

unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board



Service busOverhead

bus

GE bus Packet switching unit

Control bus

- 48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3V power supplied to the other units on the board

System clock signalClock signal provided to the

other units on the board

Ethernet processing

unit

+3.3

V

- 48 V1

+3.3V power supplied to the monitoring circuit

XPIC signal

F


SMODEM unit

- 48 V2



3-83


Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2


Processing Flow




l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system controland communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Performs the ADC sampling.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and

transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.

l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from thepaired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to theMODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IFsignal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.




l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, andSSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, andtransmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave servicesignals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and thentransmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybridmicrowave service signals to the Ethernet processingunit.


l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/DEMUX unit.

l Sends the processed signals to the packet switchingunit.





NOTE




3-85


Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2


Processing Flow






l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.

l Processes the GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, andmicrowave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.






l Amplifies the signals.




Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the boardthrough the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Power Supply Unitl This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs

the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to theODU.

l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performsthe start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power tothe other units on the IFX2.


3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels onthe front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2

IFX

2

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TSR

VLI

NK

OD

UR

MT

ACT

WARNING-48V OUTPUTTURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

IFX

2

X-IN X-OUTPULL XPIC

Indicators

Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2


XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.








3-87
























Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Interfaces

Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces




X-IN XPIC signal inputinterface

SMA XPIC cable

X-OUT XPIC signal outputinterface

SMA

NOTE



Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.




3.7.5 Valid SlotThe IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)



3-89


Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)




Item Description


3.7.6 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Related ReferencesA.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM ConfigurationA.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.7.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF Performance


Item Performance

IF signal




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Item Performance


350


140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK


5.5


10



Item Performance

Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.


Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.80 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 33 W

3.8 EM6T/EM6FThe EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces andtwo GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as



3-91

follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GEinterfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical orelectrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatiblewith the FE electrical interfaces.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

3.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FEinterfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.

3.8.5 Valid SlotsThe EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on theNMS should be the same as the physical slots.

3.8.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

3.8.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

3.8.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FEinterface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical

modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces arecompatible with the FE electrical interfaces.

l Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. Thesupported working modes are as follows:– The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M

half duplex, and auto-negotiation.– The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full

duplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

– The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLANtags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.

l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The followingthree TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame lengthranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes.

l Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

l Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function.

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.

l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).

NOTEFor details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet ServicesThe Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packetswitching board:

l Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services.

l Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LANservices.

QoS Service ProcessingThe Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with thepacket switching board:

l Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, S-VLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in theIPv6 packets.

l Supports CAR flow monitoring.

l Supports queue scheduling.– Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues.

– Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP+WRR, or WRR.

l Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.

Ethernet OAM ProcessingThe Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when workingwith the packet switching board:

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:– Management of OAM maintenance points

– Continuity check test



3-93

– Loopback test

– Link trace test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:– OAM automatic discovery

– Link performance monitoring

– Fault detection

– Loopback at the remote end

– Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking

Clock Processingl Supports synchronous Ethernet.

l Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.


l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm thresholds.


l Supports RMON performance events.

NOTE

For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports.

l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports.

l Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces.




l Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram

GE signal access unit

FE signal access unit

Ethernet processing

unit

Logic processing

unit

Logic control unit

Clock unit

Backplane

Control bus of the board


Packet switching unit

GE signal

FE signal

Ethernet signal

Ethernet signal

Control bus

+3.3 V+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board

System clockClock signal provided to the other units on the board

Control signal

Control signal

Power supply unit

-48 V1

-48 V2+3.3 V power supplied to the board


Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction


1 GE signal access unit l Provides access to GE signal.

l Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the GE signals.

l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance count forthe frame signals.



3-95



l Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to theEthernet data frames.

l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.

l Performs the QoS processing, such as trafficclassification and CAR traffic monitoring, for theEthernet data frames.

l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logicprocessing unit.


Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packetswitching unit.


Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction


1 Logic processing unit l Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packetswitching unit.

l Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernetprocessing unit.


l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.

l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shapingand queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.

l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to thecorresponding egress ports based on the egress tagscontained in the Ethernet data frames.

3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRCcode computing, and Ethernet performance count.

l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for theEthernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit throughthe control unit on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit throughthe system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system controland communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performanceevents are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power intothe +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions asa +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit

This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clocksignal to the other units on the board.

3.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FEinterfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T

EM

6 TST

AT

SR

V

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4GE2 EM

6 T

GE1PRO

G

Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F

EM

6FST

AT

SR

V

GE2 EM

6F

GE1LIN

K1LI

NK2

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4PR

OG

Indicators

Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F






3-97




l There is no power supplied to the board.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.


PROG On for 100 ms (green) and offfor 100 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the software is being loaded tothe flash memory.

On for 300 ms (green) and offfor 300 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the board software is in BIOSboot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and off for100 ms repeatedly


On (red) When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the memory self-check fails orloading the upper layer software fails.When the board is running, the logic file orupper layer software is lost.The pluggable storage card is faulty.


LINK1a On (green) The GE1 interface is connected correctlyand is not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving ortransmitting data.

Off The GE1 interface is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.


Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving ortransmitting data.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE optical interfaces.

Interfaces

Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F

Interfac

e

Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

FE1 FE interface

RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE1 GE electricalinterface

GE2

GE1 GE opticalinterface (EM6F)

LC (SFP optical module) 5.5 Fiber Jumper

GE2

The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptationmodes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-41 and referto Table 3-79 and Table 3-80.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode






3-99










Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode














Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-81.




Off The link fails.



LabelThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm(10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid SlotsThe EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on theNMS should be the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F

Item Description




3-101

3.8.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F

Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module

01 1000BASE-SX (Multi-mode, 0.5 km)

34060286

02 1000BASE-LX (Single-mode, 10 km)

34060473

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)(100m)

34100052

3.8.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

Related ReferencesA.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesA.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlA.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.8.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FEinterface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

Performance of Optical InterfacesThe optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. Thefollowing table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.

Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance


Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode opticalfiber

Single-mode opticalfiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Item Performance

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFPmodules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical InterfacesThe GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.

Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)


Performance of FE Electrical InterfacesThe FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.

Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)



3-103

Item Performance


Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

EM6T EM6F

Dimensions 19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)

Weight 0.37 kg 0.38 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W

Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W

3.9 SL1DThe SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the SL1D.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

3.9.5 Valid SlotsThe SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

3.9.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board featurecode of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the boardname.

3.9.7 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.

3.9.8 Technical Specifications




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications for Optical Interfacesl Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.

l All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.

Specifications for Optical Modulesl Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module.

l Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.

l Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser.

l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

NOTE

The ALS function is described as follows:

1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical moduleautomatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port.

2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60sinterval.

3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and terminationmode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and theoverhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in thereceive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.



3-105

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a linear MSP group.l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTE

For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.




NOTE


Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.

l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.




NOTE

A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit butdoes not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system controland communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), andservice interruption.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the SL1D.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D

Clock signal provided to theother units on the board

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

STM-1

STM-1

O/E

conversionunit

Overhead

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit

System control andcommunication unit

Overheadbus


Cross-connect unit

Clockunit System clock signal

+3.3 V

Servicebus

Control bus

Supplies power to theother units on the board


Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D


1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electricalsignals.



3-107


2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the system control and communicationunit.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks the higher order path overheads and generatesthe corresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.






Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D









Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets the higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets the multiplex section overheads.

l Sets the regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1Dthrough the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the systemcontrol and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.


3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D

SL1D

TX1/RX1

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

SL1D

STAT

SR

VLO

S1

LOS

2

TX2/RX2

Indicators

Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D






3-109









LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1D reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1D does not report theR_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SL1D reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SL1D does not reportthe R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces


TX1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

TX2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LC (SFP)




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


RX2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

Labels

There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm(10 mW).

3.9.5 Valid SlotsThe SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should bethe same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)


Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D

Item Description


3.9.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board featurecode of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the boardname.



3-111

Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D

Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) 34060287

02 S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) 34060276

03 L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) 34060281

04 L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) 34060282

3.9.7 Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.

Related ReferencesA.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesA.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadA.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.9.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.


Item Performance




Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber


2 15 40 80


1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580


-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Item Performance


-30 -28 -34 -34



10 8.2 10 10

NOTE


Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.30 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 3.4 W

3.10 SP3S/SP3DThe SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohmtributary board.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.

3.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSshould be the same as the physical slots.



3-113

3.10.6 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code ofthe bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

3.10.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

3.10.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, boardmechanical behavior and board power consumption.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.

l Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.

Clock Processingl Supports the E1 retiming function.

l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.




NOTE


Maintenance Featuresl Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces.

l Supports the PRBS 15 test.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

NOTE


l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit butdoes not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system controland communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), anda service interruption.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.


Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane

Logic control

unit

Cross-connect unit

E1

E1Interface unit

Mapping/D

emappi

ng unit


Service bus

Control bus

E1 signal Codec unit


+3.3 V

Clock unit

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board System clock signal

Power Supply Unit

-48 V1+3.3V power supplied

to the board -48 V2

+3.3V backup power supplied to the board


Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D


1 Interface unit The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformerand then are transmitted to the board.



3-115


2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs the HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.

l Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thusforming VC-12s.

l Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.

l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thusforming one TUG-2.

l Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thusforming one TUG-3.

l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thusforming one C-4.

l Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,thus forming one VC-4.





Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D





2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.

l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Extracts the E1 signals.

3 Codec unit Performs the HDB3 coding.

4 Interface unit The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and thenare transmitted to the external cable.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Control Signal Processing FlowThe SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communicationunit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of theSP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance eventsare also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.


Power Supply UnitThis unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power intothe +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions asa +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.


3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S

SP

3SST

ATS

RV

1-16 SP

3 S

E1

Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D

SP

3DS

TAT

SRV

42

22

211 S

P3D



3-117

Indicator

Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D











Interface

Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S

Interface Description ConnectorType

Corresponding Cable

1-22 The first to sixteenthE1 interfaces

Anea 96 E1 Cable to the ExternalEquipment or E1 Cable to theE1 Panel

Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D


Corresponding Cable

1-22 The first to sixteenthE1 interfaces





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Corresponding Cable

23-42 The seventeenth tothirty-second E1interfaces


NOTEIn the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment informationof the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-51 and Table 3-101.


POS.96

POS.1



















3-119











































Issue 03 (2010-01-30)














3.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSshould be the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)


Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D

Item Description




3-121

3.10.6 Board Feature CodeThe E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code ofthe bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D


A 120

B 75

3.10.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related ReferencesA.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH InterfacesA.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.10.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, boardmechanical behavior and board power consumption.



Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

SP3S SP3D


Weight 0.54 kg 0.64 kg

Power consumption

Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W

Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W

3.11 PIUThe PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightningprotection, and information reporting.

3.11.3 Working PrincipleThe PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communicationunit, and board in-position unit.

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and power access interfaces.

3.11.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the sameas the physical slot.

3.11.6 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightningprotection, and information reporting.



3-123

l Power accessThe PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. Themaximum power and maximum current of each power supply are 170 W and 5 Arespectively.

l Power protectionThe PIU protects the DC power supplies against overcurrent and short circuits. In thismanner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the caseof overcurrent.

l Lightning protectionThe PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protectionfails.

l Power backupThe two DC power supplies provide 1+1 hot backup for each other.

3.11.3 Working PrincipleThe PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communicationunit, and board in-position unit.

Figure 3-54 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Communicationunit

Boardin-position unit

Backplane

Inter-boardcommunication

bus System control andcommunication unit

Lightning protectionand failure detection

unit-48 V/-60 V

Board in-position signal

Alarm signal indicatinglightning failure

Other boards

Other boards

Alarm signalindicating lightning

failure


Lightning protectionand failure detection

unit-48 V/-60 V

Lightning Protection and Failure Detection UnitThis unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightningprotective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to systemcontrol and communication unit, through the communication unit.

Communication UnitThis unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarmsignals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.

Board In-Position UnitThis unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and power access interfaces.

Front Panel DiagramFigure 3-55 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIUP

WR

AP

WR

B

PIU

RTN

2(+

)N

EG2

(-)

RTN

1(+

)N

EG1

(-)

-48V -60V

Indicators

Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators

Indicator Status Description

PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.

Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the powersupply is connected incorrectly.

PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.


InterfacesThe PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-107 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIUand their respective usage.



3-125

Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU

Interface Interface Type Usage

NEG1(-) -48 V power inputinterface

Inputs the -48 V power.

RTN1(+) BGND power inputinterface

Inputs the BGND power.

NEG2(-) -48 V power inputinterface

Inputs the -48 V power.

RTN2(+) BGND power inputinterface

Inputs the BGND power.

LabelThe label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.

CAUTIONMultiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,ensure that these power supplies are disabled.

3.11.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the sameas the physical slot.

Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4

Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4


3.11.6 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-108 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.

Table 3-108 Technical specifications

Item Performance

Dimensions 41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0mm height)

Weight 0.12 kg

Power Consumption < 0.5 W

Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.12 FANThe FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

3.12.3 Working PrincipleThe FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speedadjustment unit, and board in-position unit.

3.12.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS shouldbe the same as the physical slot.

3.12.6 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, powerconsumption, and working voltage.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

The FAN has the following functions and features:

l Accesses one +12 V power supply for driving the three fans each of which consumes 6 Wpower.



3-127

l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans againstovercurrent.

l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the systemwith lowest power consumption and lowest noise.

l Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information.

l Provides alarm indicators.

l Disables the power supplies to the fans.

3.12.3 Working PrincipleThe FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speedadjustment unit, and board in-position unit.

Figure 3-58 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN


Three fans

+12 V powershutdown signal

Inter-boardcommunication

bus

Board in-positionunit

PWM signal

Communication unit


Fan rotatingspeed

Fan in-positionsignal

+12 V

+12 V

+12 V

Startdelay

+12 V

Intelligent fan speedadjustment unit

PWM drivingunit

Rotating speedreporting unit




Start-Delay Unit

This unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.

Communication Unit

This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambienttemperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it providesthe +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment UnitThis unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjuststhe fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are receivedfrom the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated fromeach other.

The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed inTable 3-109.

Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed

≤ 25°C Low speed (3200 rotation/min)

25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with thetemperature

≥ 60°C Full speed (16000 rotation/min)

Board In-Position UnitThis unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communicationunit.

3.12.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel DiagramFigure 3-59 shows the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN



3-129

Indicators

Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators


FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap JackThe ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the propergrounding of the human body.

LabelsThe front panel of the FAN has the following labels:

l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS shouldbe the same as the physical slot.

Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU)

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 10

Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN

Slot 6(FAN)

Slot 5(PIU) Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 4


3.12.6 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, powerconsumption, and working voltage.

Table 3-111 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance

Dimensions 42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)

Weight 0.200 kg

Power consumption <2.3 W (room temprature)<17 W (high temperature)

Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)



3-131

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit(PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements.

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories


4-1

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panelR1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Interfaces

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector

T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to16th E1 ports (connected tothe external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16thE1 ports (connected to theexternal equipment)

1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connectedto an IDU)

DB37

9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports(connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a protectionground cable

-

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer toTable 4-2.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 910



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)


20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

2 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

3 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

22 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

23 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

4 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

5 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

24 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

25 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

6 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

7 3nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)

26 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

8 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)

9 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)















4-3






Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C powerdistribution mode is used.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4

1 4

1 2 3 4

OUTPUT OUTPUTA B

2

20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A

5 6

1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces

Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU

Position Interface Description

Output powerterminals (A)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

PGNDterminals

Grounding studof the two-holeOT terminal

For connecting the PGND cable

Input powerterminals

RTN1(+) The first power input (+)

RTN2(+) The second power input (+)

NEG1(-) The first power input (-)

NEG2(-) The second power input (-)

Output powerterminals (B)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

Powerswitches (A)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,respectively.

Powerswitches (B)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,respectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

Functionsl The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.

l Each input power supply supports four outputs.

l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.

l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.



4-5

Working PrincipleThe PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4

SW4

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

+ 1-+ 2-+ 3-+ 4-

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PGND

BGND

BGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C powerdistribution mode is used.

The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that isinside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuitsterminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution ModeTo use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode



4-7

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cablesof the IDU 910.

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.

5.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGNDcable.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmitthe IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber JumperThe fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with anLC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on theOptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminateddepends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.

5.6 E1 CablesThe E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipmentand E1 cable to the E1 panel.

5.7 Orderwire CableThe orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwirecable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to thePHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connectedto the interface of the orderwire phone.

5.8 Network Cable

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables


5-1

The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cableare terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 910



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Power cable

1U DC connector

Single cord end terminal

Power cable

Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable

Model Cable Terminal

2.5 mm2 powercable andterminal

Power Cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K-2.5mm2, Blue/Black,Low Smoke ZeroHalogen Cable

Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A,Insertion Depth 8 mm, Blue

NOTE

In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm2 can extend fora maximum distance of 50 m.

5.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGNDcable.

5.2.1 IDU PGND CableThe IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and theexternal equipment share the same ground.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable



5-3

The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point ofthe external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel andthe external equipment share the same ground.

5.2.1 IDU PGND CableThe IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and theexternal equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

2

Main label

H.S.tubeCable tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin AssignmentNone.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND CableThe E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point ofthe external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel andthe external equipment share the same ground.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

1

Main label

L

Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin AssignmentNone.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmitthe IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-Nconnector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with aTNC connector and is connected to the IF board.

NOTE

l The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumperis not required.

l When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable to the IF board.



5-5

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2 PCSL = 3 cm

2000 mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin AssignmentNone.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPICcable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the otherend of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPICworking group.

When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-INport and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.

The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:

l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction.

l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is veryshort, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cableusing straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the sameIFX2 board to loop back signals.

The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

L1

1 1

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.5 Fiber JumperThe fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with anLC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on theOptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminateddepends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber


LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber


NOTEIn the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE opticalinterfaces.



5-7

Fiber ConnectorsThe following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 E1 CablesThe E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipmentand E1 cable to the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External EquipmentThe E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signalsdirectly to the external equipment.

5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 PanelThe E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to theE1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated witha DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable isterminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.

5.6.3 E1 Transit CableAn E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transitcable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected tothe E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External EquipmentThe E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signalsdirectly to the external equipment.

Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cablesand 120-ohm twisted pair cables.



5-9

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 E1 cable

Main label

1W

X1 A

View A

Pos .1

Pos.96Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,

Female Connector

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE

l The appearance of the 120–ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75–ohm E1 cable.

l The core of a 75–ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098–inch) crimp pliers to terminatethe ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 75–1–1 coaxial connectors.

Pin Assignment

Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

1 Tip 1 R1 25 Tip 2 T1

2 Ring 26 Ring

3 Tip 3 R2 27 Tip 4 T2

4 Ring 28 Ring

5 Tip 5 R3 29 Tip 6 T3

6 Ring 30 Ring

7 Tip 7 R4 31 Tip 8 T4

8 Ring 32 Ring




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

9 Tip 9 R5 33 Tip 10 T5

10 Ring 34 Ring

11 Tip 11 R6 35 Tip 12 T6

12 Ring 36 Ring

13 Tip 13 R7 37 Tip 14 T7

14 Ring 38 Ring

15 Tip 15 R8 39 Tip 16 T8

16 Ring 40 Ring

17 Ring 17 R9 41 Ring 18 T9

18 Tip 42 Tip

19 Ring 19 R10 43 Ring 20 T10

20 Tip 44 Tip

21 Ring 21 R11 45 Ring 22 T11

22 Tip 46 Tip

23 Ring 23 R12 47 Ring 24 T12

24 Tip 48 Tip

49 Ring 25 R13 73 Ring 26 T13

50 Tip 74 Tip

51 Ring 27 R14 75 Ring 28 T14

52 Tip 76 Tip

53 Ring 29 R15 77 Ring 30 T15

54 Tip 78 Tip

55 Ring 31 R16 79 Ring 32 T16

56 Tip 80 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid



5-11

Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Color oftheCore

Relation

Color oftheCore

Relation

1 White Twistedpair

R1 25 White Twistedpair

T1

2 Blue 26 Orange

3 White Twistedpair


T2

4 Green 28 Brown

5 White Twistedpair

R3 29 Red Twistedpair

T3

6 Grey 30 Blue

7 Red Twistedpair


T4

8 Orange 32 Green

9 Red Twistedpair


T5

10 Brown 34 Grey

11 Black Twistedpair

R6 35 Black Twistedpair

T6

12 Blue 36 Orange



T7

14 Green 38 Brown


R8 39 Yellow Twistedpair

T8

16 Grey 40 Blue

17 White Twistedpair


T9

18 Blue 42 Orange



T10

20 Green 44 Brown



T11

22 Grey 46 Blue

23 Red Twistedpair


T12

24 Orange 48 Green

49 Red Twistedpair


T13

50 Brown 74 Grey




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Pin W1 Remarks

Pin W2 Remarks

Color oftheCore

Relation

Color oftheCore

Relation



T14

52 Blue 76 Orange



T15

54 Green 78 Brown


R16 79 Yellow Twistedpair

T16

56 Grey 80 Blue


5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 PanelThe E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to theE1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated witha DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable isterminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel

1500 mm

A

APos.1

Pos.44

X1B

Pos.1

Pos.37

B

X2

X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male



5-13

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks

X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5

X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17

X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6

X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15

X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7

X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13

X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8

X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11

X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5

X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16

X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6

X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14

X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7

X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12

X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8

X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10


5.6.3 E1 Transit CableAn E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transitcable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected tothe E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.

An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors

Label 2M092

X3

X22

#4-40View BPos.44

Pos.1

Main Label

W2

W1Label 1

X1A

B

400

X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 femaleLabel 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44connectors

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.2 X2.38 R1 X1.10 X2.34 R5

X1.1 X2.23 X1.9 X2.19

X1.26 X2.15 T1 X1.34 X2.11 T5

X1.25 X2.30 X1.33 X2.26

X1.4 X2.37 R2 X1.12 X2.33 R6

X1.3 X2.22 X1.11 X2.18

X1.28 X2.14 T2 X1.36 X2.10 T6

X1.27 X2.29 X1.35 X2.25

X1.6 X2.36 R3 X1.14 X2.32 R7

X1.5 X2.21 X1.13 X2.17



5-15

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.30 X2.13 T3 X1.38 X2.9 T7

X1.29 X2.28 X1.37 X2.24

X1.8 X2.35 R4 X1.16 X2.31 R8

X1.7 X2.20 X1.15 X2.16

X1.32 X2.12 T4 X1.40 X2.8 T8

X1.31 X2.27 X1.39 X2.7

W2 X1.18 X3.38 R9 X1.50 X3.34 R13

X1.17 X3.23 X1.49 X3.19

X1.42 X3.15 T9 X1.74 X3.11 T13

X1.41 X3.30 X1.73 X3.26

X1.20 X3.37 R10 X1.52 X3.33 R14

X1.19 X3.22 X1.51 X3.18

X1.44 X3.14 T10 X1.76 X3.10 T14

X1.43 X3.29 X1.75 X3.25

X1.22 X3.36 R11 X1.54 X3.32 R15

X1.21 X3.21 X1.53 X3.17

X1.46 X3.13 T11 X1.78 X3.9 T15

X1.45 X3.28 X1.77 X3.24

X1.24 X3.35 R12 X1.56 X3.31 R16

X1.23 X3.20 X1.55 X3.16

X1.48 X3.12 T12 X1.80 X3.8 T16

X1.47 X3.27 X1.79 X3.7


5.7 Orderwire CableThe orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwirecable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to thePHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connectedto the interface of the orderwire phone.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable

1

6

1

6

1 Main label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Function

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.8 Network CableThe network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cableare terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, thenetwork card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDI-X interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDI-X interface, see Table 5-9.

Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface








5-17








Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface











Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables areused between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between thestraight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.

The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiXRTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet serviceelectrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main Label

1. Network port connector, RJ-45

Pin Assignment

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable


X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair



5-19


X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A Parameters Description

This topic describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameters for NE ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.2 Parameters for Cable ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.

A.3 Parameters for Communications ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.4 Radio Link ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.6 SDH/PDH Service ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.7 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.9 Ethernet Protocol ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAMThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).

A.11 QoS ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.12 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description


A-1

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.15 Parameters for OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A Parameters DescriptionOptiX RTN 910


A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.1 Parameters for NE ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE TimeThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NEtime.

A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEsThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functionsof an NE.

A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation PathOn the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.



A-3

Parameters for the Search FieldParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Address Type IP Address of GNENSAP AddressIP Address Range of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on NSAPAddress only.

l If the IP protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on IP Address ofGNE or IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To search for all theNEs that communicatewith the gateway NE,select IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To select the gatewayNE only, select IPAddress of GNE.

NOTEIf Address Type is set to IPAddress of GNE or IPAddress Range of GNE,and if the U2000 (server)and the gateway NE arelocated in different networksegments, ensure that theU2000 and relevant routersare configured with the IProutes for the networksegment in which theU2000 and gateway NE arelocated.

If Address Type is set toNSAP Address, ensure thatthe OSI protocol stack isinstalled.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Search Address - - l If Address Type is setto IP Address ofGNE, enter the IPaddress of the gatewayNE, such as 129.9.x.x.

l If Address Type is setto IP Address Rangeof GNE, enter thenumber of the IPnetwork segment inwhich the gateway NEis located, such as129.9.255.255.

l If Address Type is setto NSAP Address,enter the NSAP addressof the gateway NE.

User Name - - This parameter specifiesthe user name of thegateway NE.

Password - - This parameter specifiesthe password of thegateway NE.

Parameter for Searching for NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Search for NE SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter specifieswhether to search for allthe NEs in the specifieddomain.



A-5


Create NE after search SelectedDeselected

Deselected l To create NEs inbatches, it isrecommended that youselect Create NE aftersearch. The NEs areautomatically createdafter they are found.

l After Create NE aftersearch is selected,enter NE User andPassword that are usedfor creating an NE.

NOTEIf only Create NE aftersearch is selected, Searchfor NE is selectedautomatically.

NE User - - l This parameterspecifies the user nameto be entered when anNE is created.

l This parameter is validonly when Create NEafter search isselected.

Password - - l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.


Upload after create SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterspecifies whether toautomatically uploadthe NE data after theNE is found andcreated.

l If only Upload aftercreate is selected,Search for NE andCreate NE aftersearch are selectedautomatically.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameter for the Found NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the found NE,which consists ofextended ID and NE ID.For example, in the case ofNE9-25, the value 9indicates the extended ID,and the value 25 indicatesthe NE ID.

GNE Address - - This parameter indicatesthe address of the gatewayNE that is connected to thefound NE.

GNE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the gateway NEthat is connected to thefound NE.

Created As GNE YesNo

Yes l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.


Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communicationbetween the client and theserver is encrypted if thisparameter is set toSecurity SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifiesthe communication port.

NE Status CreatedUncreated

- This parameter indicateswhether the found NE iscreated.

A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.



A-7

Navigation Path1. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main InterfaceParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the NE to becreated.

ID - - l The ID refers to thebasic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.

l This parameter is setaccording to theplanning information.

NOTEThe NE ID consisting of thebasic ID and extended IDidentifies an NE on theNMS.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changethe extended ID.

Name - - l This parameterspecifies the name ofthe NE.

l After you specifies thename of the NE, thename is displayedunder the icon of theNE.

Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remarks of the NE.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Gateway Type Non-GatewayGateway

Non-Gateway l This parameter is set toGateway if the new NEis a gateway NE.

l This parameter is set toNon-Gateway if thenew NE is a non-gateway NE.

l This parameter is setaccording to the DCNplanning if the new NEcan function as agateway NE or a non-gateway NE.

Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicatesthe gateway NE of the newNE when Gateway Typeis set to Non-Gateway.

Affiliated GatewayProtocol

IPOSI

IP l This parameter needs tobe set when GatewayType is set toGateway.

l When the OSI overDCC solution is used,this parameter is set toOSI.

l In other cases, thisparameter is set to IP.

IP Address - - This parameter indicatesthe IP address of the newNE. This parameter needsto be set when AffiliatedGateway Protocol is setto IP.


Common The communicationbetween the client and theserver is encrypted if thisparameter is set toSecurity SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifiesthe communication port.

NE User - - This parameter specifiesthe user name to beentered when an NE iscreated.



A-9


Password - - This parameter specifiesthe password to be enteredwhen an NE is created.

NSAP Address - - This parameter indicatesthe NSAP address of thenew NE. This parameterneeds to be set whenAffiliated GatewayProtocol is set to OSI.You need to set the area IDonly, and the other partsare automaticallygenerated by the NE.

A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.2. Choose Object Attributes.3. Click Modify NE ID.

Parameters for Changing NE IDsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers tothe basic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.


NOTEThe NE ID consisting of thebasic ID and extended IDidentifies an NE on theNMS.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changethe extended ID.

A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time SynchronizationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the NE.

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the NE.

Synchronous Mode Standard NTPNMNull

Null l If this parameter is setto NM, the NEsynchronizes the timeof the NMS server.

l If this parameter is setto Standard NTP, theNE synchronizes theNetwork TimeProtocol (NTP) serverthrough the standardNTP.

Standard NTPAuthentication

EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter is validonly when SynchronousMode is set to StandardNTP.



A-11

Parameters for the Standard NTP ServerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP ServerIdentifier

NE IDIP

NE ID l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to IP.

l If the NE functions as anon-gateway NE andcommunicates with thegateway NE throughthe HWECC protocol,this parameter is set toNE ID.

l If the NE functions as anon-gateway NE andcommunicates with thegateway NE throughthe IP protocol, thisparameter is set to IP.

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to theIP address of theexternal NTP server.

l If the NE functions as anon-gateway NE, thisparameter is set to theID or IP address of thegateway NE.

Standard NTP ServerKey

0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server doesnot need toauthenticated, thisparameter is set to thevalue "0".

l If the NTP server needsto be authenticated, theauthentication isperformed according tothe allocated key of theNTP server. In thiscase, the NEauthenticates the NTPserver based on the keyand the correspondingpassword (specified inthe management of thestandard NTP key).




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization


SynchronizationStarting Time

- - l This parameterspecifies the start timeof the synchronizationperiod. After thisparameter is specified,the NMS and the NEsynchronize the timeonce at the intervals ofSynchronizationPeriod(days).

l It is recommended thatyou use the defaultvalue.

DST SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterindicates whetherSynchronizationStarting Time is thedaylight saving time.

l This parameter is setaccording to the actualsituation.

Synchronization Period(days)

1 to 300 1 l This parameterindicates the period ofsynchronizing the timeof the NE with the timeof the NMS.


A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NETime

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NEtime.

Navigation Path1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time

Localization Management.

2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click

.



A-13

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE TimeParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE - - This parameter indicates the name of theNE.

TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.

DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST isenabled.

Parameters for Time ZoneParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, thecurrent time of the NE is changedaccordingly.

l This parameter is set according to theplace where the NE is located.

DST SelectedDeselected

Deselected l The parameters related to daylight savingtime can be valid only when thisparameter is selected.

l This parameter is set according to thesituation whether daylight saving time isused in the place where the NE is located.

Offset 1 to 120Unit: minute(s)

- This parameter specifies the offset value ofthe daylight saving time.

Start Rule DATEWEEK

WEEK This parameter specifies the method ofadjusting the daylight saving time.

Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylightsaving time.

End Rule DATEWEEK

WEEK This parameter specifies the method ofadjusting the daylight saving time.

End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylightsaving time.

A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.



NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the NE.

Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameterindicates the key forNTP authentication.

l This parameter is setaccording to therequirements of theexternal NTP server.

Password - - l This parameterindicates the passwordthat corresponds toKey.

l This parameter is setaccording to therequirements of theexternal NTP server.



A-15


Trusted YesNo

Yes l When this parameter isset to No, the keyverification is nottrusted. After receivingthe key, the NE rejectsthe clocksynchronizationservice.

l When this parameter isset to Yes, the keyverification is trusted.After receiving the key,the NE provides theclock synchronizationservice.

l After receiving anunknown or incorrectkey, the NE rejects theclock synchronizationservice. Hence, it isrecommended that youset a trusted key only.

A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functionsof NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functionsof an NE.

Navigation Path1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic

Disabling of NE Function.2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and

then click .

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of theNE.

NE Type OptiX RTN 910 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of theoperation, such as loopback, and shutdownof the laser.

Auto Disabling DisabledEnabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether toautomatically disable the operations such asloopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Auto DisablingTime(min)

1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time ofautomatically disabling the operations suchas loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.2 Parameters for Cable ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber SearchThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.

A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber SearchThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.

Navigation Path1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of

the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click

.3. Click Search.

Parameters for Searching For FibersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Source NE - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the source NEon which fibers or radiolinks are found.



A-17


Source Board - - This parameter indicatesthe board and slot of thesource NE on which fibersor radio links are found.

Source Port - - This parameter indicatesthe number of the port onthe board of the source NEon which fibers or radiolinks are found.

Sink NE - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the sink NE onwhich fibers or radio linksare found.

Sink Board - - This parameter indicatesthe board and slot of thesink NE on which fibers orradio links are found.

Sink Port - - This parameter indicatesthe number of the port onthe board of the sink NEon which fibers or radiolinks are found.

Level - - This parameter indicatesthe level of the found fiberor the working mode ofthe found radio link.

Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the foundfiber or radio link.

Direction Two-Fiber BidirectionalSingle-FiberUnidirectional

- This parameter indicatesthe direction of the foundfiber.

Conflict with logical link(Y/N)

YesNo

- This parameter indicateswhether the found fiber orradio link conflicts withthe fiber or radio linkdisplayed on the NMS.

Operation Result SucceededFailed

- This parameter indicateswhether the cable iscreated successfully.

Fiber/Cable Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the found fiberor cable.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.

Navigation Path1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is

displayed.

2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.

Parameters for Fibers


Create Ways Common WaysBatch Ways

Common Ways l If Common Ways isselected, fibers need tocreated one by one.

l If Batch Ways isselected, fibers can becreated in batches.

Fiber/Cable Type Fiber Fiber This parameter indicatesthat Fiber/Cable Type tobe created is a fiber.

Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the fiber to becreated. The nameconsists of up to 255characters, excludingcertain special marks suchas | * ? " < >.

Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remark informationcustomized by the user.

Source NE - - This parameter specifiesthe source NE on whichthe fiber needs to becreated.

Source NE Slot-BoardType-Port

- - This parameter specifiesthe board, slot, and port ofthe source NE on whichthe fiber needs to becreated.

Rate Level - - This parameter indicatesthe level that correspondsto the port on the board.



A-19


Medium Type G.652G.653G.654G.655

G.652 This parameter specifiesthe medium type of thefiber.

Sink NE - - This parameter specifiesthe sink NE on which thefiber needs to be created.

Sink NE Slot-BoardType-Port

- - This parameter specifiesthe board, slot, and port ofthe sink NE on which thefiber needs to be created.

Direction Two-Fiber BidirectionalSingle-FiberUnidirectional

- This parameter specifiesthe direction of the fiber tobe created.

Length(km) - - This parameter specifiesthe length of the fiber to becreated.

Attenuation(dB) - - This parameter specifiesthe attenuation of the fiberto be created.

Created On - - This parameter specifiesthe time when the fiber iscreated.

Creator - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the personwho creates the fiber.

Maintainer - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the personwho maintains the fiber.

A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.

Navigation Path1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is

displayed.2. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Microwave LinksParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Fiber/Cable Type Radio Link Radio Link This parameter indicatesthat a radio link needs tobe created is Fiber/CableType.

Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the radio linkto be created. The nameconsists of up to 255characters, excludingcertain special marks suchas | * ? " < >.

Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remark informationcustomized by the user.

Source NE - - The parameter specifiesthe source NE on whichthe radio link needs to becreated.

Source NE Slot-BoardType-Port

- - This parameter specifiesthe board, slot, and port ofthe source NE on whichthe radio link needs to becreated.

Rate Level - - This parameter indicatesthe level that correspondsto the port on the IF board.

Sink NE - - The parameter specifiesthe sink NE on which theradio link needs to becreated.

Sink NE Slot-BoardType-Port

- - This parameter specifiesthe board, slot, and port ofthe sink NE on which theradio link needs to becreated.

Length(km) - - This parameter specifiesthe length of the radio linkto be created.

Created On - - This parameter indicatesthe time when the radiolink is created.



A-21


Creator - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the personwho creates the radio link.

Maintainer - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the personwho maintains the radiolink.

A.3 Parameters for Communications ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECCThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter SettingsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARPThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer ParameterThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocolmodel.

A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI TunnelThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication ParameterSetting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting


IP Address - Before delivery,the IP address ofthe NE is set to129.9.0.x. Theletter x indicatesthe basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address isset according to the following rules:l The IP address, subnet mask, and

default gateway of the gateway NEshould meet the planning requirementsof the external DCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IPaddress must be in the same networksegment.

l The IP address of other NEs should beset according to the NE ID. In this case,the IP address of an NE should be setin the format of 0x81000000+ID. Thatis, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP addressshould be set to 129.9.0.1.

Gateway IP Address - 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID whenthe number of actual NEs does notexceed the range permitted by the basicNE ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.


Common The communication between the clientand the server is encrypted if thisparameter is set to Security SSL.



A-23

A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC RateConfiguration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC

Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration


Port - - This parameter indicates the port that isconnected to the DCC channel.NOTE

On the NMS interface, the first interface on thesystem control, switching, and clock board (like1-CSHC-1) corresponds to its external clockinterface.

Enabled/Disabled EnabledDisabled

Enabled (for lineports)Disabled (forexternal clockinterfaces)

It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the port is connected to the other ECC

subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set toDisabled.

l If the port is connected to a third-partynetwork and does not exchange thenetwork management information withother ports, Enabled/Disabled is set toDisabled.

l If external clock interfaces are used totransparently transmit the DCC solution,Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled forthe external clock interfaces.

Channel Type D1-D3D4-D12D1-D12D1-D1

D1-D1 (for the PDHradio whosetransmissioncapacity is less than16xE1)D1-D3 (for othercases)

It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC

solution is adopted, Channel Type forthe SDH line ports is set to a value that isthe same as the value for third-partynetwork.

l If the DCC transparent transmissionsolution is adopted, the value of ChannelType for the SDH line ports should notconflict with the value that is set for thethird-party network.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCCresources.

CommunicationStatus

- - This parameter indicates thecommunication status.

Protocol Type HWECCTCP/IPOSI

HWECC It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to OSI.

LAPD Role UserNetwork

User l This parameter is valid only whenProtocol Type is set to OSI.

l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPDRole must be set to User for one end andmust be set to Network for the other end.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC TransparentTransmission Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Source Timeslot/Porta

- - This parameter indicates the source timeslotor port.



A-25


TransparentTransmission ofOverhead Bytes atSource Port

D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9D10D11D12E1E2F1K1K2X1X2X3X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selectedeach time.

l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate thecustomized overhead bytes that are usedfor transmitting asynchronous dataservices.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that isused. For example, an overhead bytecannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

Sink Timeslot/Porta

- - This parameter indicates the sink timeslot orport.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


TransparentTransmission ofOverhead Bytes atSink Port

D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9D10D11D12E1E2F1K1K2X1X2X3X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selectedeach time.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that isused. For example, an overhead bytecannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

l Generally, Transparent Transmissionof Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can beset to a value that is the same as ordifferent from the value in the case ofSource Timeslot/Port.

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functionsthe same regardless of the source port or sink port.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet PortExtended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation PathClick an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from theFunction Tree.



A-27

Parameters for the ECC Extended ModeParameter Value Range Default Value Description

ECC ExtendedMode

AutomaticallyAssignSpecified mode

AutomaticallyAssign

It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Parameters for Setting the ServerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP - 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe server.

Port 1601 to 1699 1601 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specifiedmode.

l This parameter can be set only when theNE functions as the server of theextended ECC. In normal cases, the NEthat is close to the U2000 functions as theserver.

l This parameter can be set to any valuefrom 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the ClientParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specifiedmode.

l This parameter can be set only when theNE functions as the client of the extendedECC. Except for the NE that functions asthe server, all other NEs that use theextended ECC can function as the client.

l Opposite IP and Port are respectively setto the IP address of the server NE and thespecified pot number.

Port 1601 to 1699 1601

A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECCLink Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter for NE ECC Link ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of theECC connection.

Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transferNE and the direction of the ECC route.

Distance 0 to 64 0 l This parameter specifies the number ofNEs (excluding the source NE and sinkNE) through which the ECC route passes,namely, the number of ECC packetforwarding attempts. The value can be setto a value that is greater than the numberof actual ECC packet forwardingattempts. If the value is set to a value thatis less than the number of actual ECCpacket forwarding attempts, however, thedestination NE fails to be accessed.

l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that thesource NE is adjacent to the destinationNE.

Level 45

- l This parameter indicates that multipleECC routes from the source NE to thedestination NE may be available. AnECC route of a higher priority is selectedto transmit the packets to the destinationNE.

l If the ECC route is generatedautomatically, the priority is 4.

l If the ECC route is added manually, thepriority is 5.

Mode ManualAutomatic

- This parameter indicates the ECC routingmode.

SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical portthrough which the ECC route passes. Thevalue of this parameter is automaticallyassigned the NE.



A-29

A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP

Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route Management


DestinationAddress

- - This parameter specifies the destinationaddress of the packets. This parameter canbe set to a valid IP address of class A, B, orC only, but cannot be set to the IP addressof the local host or the loopback addresswith the 127 field.

Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask ofthe destination address of the packets.

Gateway IP - - This parameter specifies the IP address ofthe gateway on the subnetwork where theNE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.

Protocol DIRECTSTATICOSPFRIPOSPF_ASEOSPF_NSSA

- l DIRECT: indicates the route betweenthe local NE and an adjacent NE.

l STATIC: indicates the route that iscreated manually.

l OSPF: indicates the route between thelocal NE and a non-adjacent NE.

l RIP: indicates the route that is discoveredby the routing information protocol.

l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is beyond theOSPF domain.

l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is in a not so stubbyarea (NSSA).

l A route can be deleted in the case ofSTATIC only, but cannot be edited in theother cases.

l Compared with a dynamic route, a staticroute has a higher priority. If any conflictoccurs, the static route is preferred.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that isused on the route. Interface is a conceptspecified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Inthe TCP/IP protocol stack, you can createmultiple types of interface, such as aloopback interface (namely, the interfacewhose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernetinterface, and PPP interface. Each interfacemust have a unique interface name.

Hop Count 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximumnumber of routers through which thepackets are transmitted. Hop Count is usedto indicate the overhead bytes that aretransmitted to the destination address. Thesmaller the value, the less the overheadbytes. If multiple routes can reach the samedestination address, a route whose overheadis less is preferred to transmit the packets.

Working Status WorkingUnworking

- This parameter indicates whether thecurrent IP route is available.

A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IP Route Management tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP RoutesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

DestinationAddress

- - This parameter specifies the destinationaddress of the packets. This parameter canbe set to a valid IP address of class A, B, orC only, but cannot be set to the IP addressof the local host or the loopback addresswith the 127 field.

Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask ofthe destination address of the packets.



A-31


Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address ofthe gateway on the subnetwork where theNE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.

A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPFParameter Settings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Area - - l The OSPF protocol supports the divisionof NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEsin the same area can transmit the OSPFpackets to each other to generate theroute.

l When setting the area for the NEs, youneed to set the NEs that run the OSPFprotocol to the same area.

DCC Hello Timer(s)

1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hellopacket timer at the DCC interface.

l The Hello packets are used for detectingthe neighbor router on the network that isconnected to the router. By periodicallytransmitting the hello packets, you candetermine whether the interface on theneighbor router is still in the active status.

l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines theinterval for the hello packet timer totransmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to thesame value.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


DCC NeighborDead Time(s)

1 to 65535 6 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifiesthe dead time of a neighbor router at theDCC interface.

l If the local router fails to receive the hellopackets from the connected neighborrouter within the time specified in DCCNeighbor Dead Time(s), it considersthat the neighbor router is unavailable.

l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should beset to a value that is a minimum of twicethe value of DCC Hello Timer(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCCNeighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPFprotocol fails to operate normally.

DCCRetransmissionTimer(s)

1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifiesthe interval for transmitting a requestthrough the DCC interface to retransmit thelink state advertisement (LSA) packets.

DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time totransmit the LSA packets through theDCC interface.

l The LSA packets in the LSA database ofthe local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they arebeing transmitted on the network. Hence,before the LSA packets are transmitted,you need to increase the age of the LSApackets based on the value of DCC Delay(s).

LAN Hello Timer(s)

1 to 255 - l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hellopacket timer at the LAN interfaces.

l The hello packets are used for detectingthe neighbor router on the network that isconnected to the router. By periodicallytransmitting the hello packets, you candetermine whether the interface on theneighbor router is still in the active status.

l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines theinterval for the hello packet timer of theNE to transmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to thesame value.



A-33


LAN NeighborDead Time(s)

1 to 65535 - l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifiesthe dead time of a neighbor router at theLAN interface.

l If the local router fails to receive the hellopackets from the connected neighborrouter within the time specified in LANNeighbor Dead Time(s), it considersthat the neighbor router is unavailable.

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should beset to a value that is a minimum of twotimes the value of LAN Neighbor DeadTime(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCCNeighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPFprotocol fails to operate normally.

LANRetransmissionTimer(s)

1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifiesthe time for transmitting a request forretransmission of the LSA packets throughthe LAN interface.

LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time totransmit the LSA packets through theLAN interface.

l The LSA packets in the LSA database ofthe local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they arebeing transmitted on the network. Hence,before the LSA packets are transmitted,you need to increase the age of the LSApackets based on the value of LAN Delay(s).

A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARPThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARPParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Proxy ARP DisabledEnabled

Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in thesame network segment but differentdomains to communicate with each other.

l To realize communication between suchNEs, the source NE sends the ARPbroadcast packet to address the route tothe destination NE. The NE with theproxy ARP function enabled checks therouting table after sensing the ARPbroadcast packet. If the routing tablecontains the destination address that theARP broadcast packet looks for, the NEreturns a ARP spoofing packet, whichenables the NE that sends the ARPbroadcast packet to consider that theMAC address of the NE that returns theARP spoofing packet is the MAC addressof the destination NE. In this manner, thepacket that is to be sent to the destinationNE is first sent to the NE with the proxyARP function enabled and thenforwarded to the destination NE.

A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network LayerParameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocolmodel.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-35


Configuration Role L1L2

L1 l Configuration Role cannot be set toES.

l An NE whose Configuration Role is setto L1 cannot function as a neighbor of anNE in the other area. It uses a route in thelocal area only and access the other areaby distributing the default route of thenearest L2 NE.

l An NE whose Configuration Role is setto L2 can function as a neighbor of an NEin the other area and can use a route in thebackbone area. The backbone area is acollection that is formed by consecutiveL2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the rolesmust be consecutive (connected to eachother).

Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.

A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.


Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Routing Tables


Port - - This parameter indicates the port used forOSI communication.

Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that isused at the data link layer.

Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier ofthe adjacency that is set up by two NEsthrough the OSI protocol. One adjacencynumber corresponds to an OSI adjacency.

l The value is dynamically allocated by theNE.

Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of theadjacency.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of theadjacency.

Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that iscontained in the NSAP address of theopposite NE.

Peer End SystemID

- - This parameter indicates the system ID ofthe opposite NE. Generally, the system IDis the MAC address.

Destination AreaID

- - This parameter indicates the area ID of thedestination NE.

Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID ofthe destination NE. Generally, the systemID is the MAC address.

Metric - - ++This parameter indicates the number ofhops that reach the destination NE ordestination area.

Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of theadjacent link that is connected to thedestination NE.

Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of theadjacent link that is connected to thedestination NE.

A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI TunnelThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.


Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.

Parameters for OSI Tunnel AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe opposite end of the OSI tunnel.



A-37


LAPD Actor UserNetwork

User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.

l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,they can perform the LAPD negotiationonly when the LAPD actor is set toUser at one end and is set to Network atthe other end.

Efficient LAPDEnable

- - This parameter indicates whether thecurrent LAPD is enabled.

ConfigurableLAPD Enable

EnabledDisabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPDis enabled.

LAPD ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time toRetry(s)

1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Timeto Retry(s).

l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates theinterval for retransmitting packets at theLAPD link layer.

l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to beset according to the network situation. Ifthe network is in good situation, L2 WaitTime to Retry(s) can be set to a smallervalue. Otherwise, it is recommended thatyou set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to agreater value.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information. In normalcases, it is recommended that you use thedefault value.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 RetryTimes.

l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximumnumber of packet retransmissionattempts at the LAPD link layer.

l L2 Retry Times needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L2 RetryTimes can be set to a smaller value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L2 Retry Times to a greater value.


L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer(s).

l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hellopacket timer at the LAPD link networklayer. It is used for periodicaltransmission of the Hello packets.

l The Hello timer determines the intervalfor transmitting the Hello packets once.L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 HelloTimer(s) can be set to a greater value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.




A-39


L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer(s).

l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ESconfiguration timer at the LAPD linknetwork layer. It is used for setting thetime to transmit the configurationinformation on the ES route.

l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set accordingto the network situation. If the network isin good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can beset to a greater value. Otherwise, it isrecommended that you set L3 HelloTimer(s) to a smaller value.


L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer(s).

l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the ISconfiguration timer at the LAPD linknetwork layer. It is used for setting thetime to transmit the configurationinformation through the L1/L2 router.

l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set accordingto the network situation. If the network isin good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can beset to a greater value. Otherwise, it isrecommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a smaller value.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer(s).

l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the holdtimer at the LAPD link network layer.

l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 HoldTimer(s) can be set to a smaller value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.


COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value ofthe virtual LAPD that corresponds to theOSI tunnel.

l The overhead value determines whetherthis link is perverted. If the overheadvalue is smaller, this link has a higherpriority to be selected.

l This parameter needs to set according tothe planning information.

A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_BandwidthManagement

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.



A-41

Parameters for Bandwidth ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Ethernet BoardVLAN ID

1 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCNcan be connected to the NMS through theSCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 canalso be connected to the NMS through anEthernet interface. If an Ethernet port isused to carry the network managementinformation, the NE differentiates thenetwork management information andEthernet service information according tothe VLAN ID.

l If the default VLAN ID of the inbandDCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in theservice, the VLAN ID of the inband DCNcan be changed manually. The sameVLAN ID must be, however, is used onthe network-wide inband DCN.

Bandwidth(kbps) - - This parameter specifies the bandwidth ofthe inband DCN.

E1 PortBandwidth(kbps)

- - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Tunnel Bandwidth(kbps)


IF Port Bandwidth(kbps)


A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting FE or GE PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the FEor GE port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Enable Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the FEor GE port is enabled.

l The inband DCN can transmit thenetwork management information overthe link only after the inband DCNfunction is enabled at the FE or GE portsat both ends of a link.

Parameters for Setting IF PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the IFport.

Enable Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the IFport is enabled.

l The inband DCN can transmit thenetwork management information overthe link only after the IF ports at both endsof a link are enabled on the inband DCN.

A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose

Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting a ProtocolParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - Displays the port name.



A-43


Protocol Type IPHWECC

IP l If the values of ProtocolType aredifferent from each other, the equipmentat both ends cannot be interconnectedwith each other. Therefore, ProtocolType must be set to the same value forthe equipment at both ends of a link.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information. Generally, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to IP.

A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > AccessControl from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access ControlParameter Value Range Default Value Description

The First NetworkPort

EnabledDisabled

Enabled After The First Network Port is set toEnabled for Ethernet access, the NE canaccess the NMS through the Ethernet port.

Parameters for Access Control over Serial PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Enable Serial PortAccess

SelectedDeselected

Selected After Enable Serial Port Access isselected, the NE can access the NMS orcommand lines through the serial port.

Access CommandLine

SelectedDeselected

Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, theserial interface can be used to access thecommand line terminal.

Access NM SelectedDeselected

Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interfacecan be used to access the NMS.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Baud Rate 1200240048009600192003840057600115200

9600 l This parameter specifies the datatransmission rate in the communicationsthrough serial ports.

l This parameter is set according to the rateof the serial port at the opposite end, andthe rates at both ends must be the same.

A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT AccessControl from the Function Tree.

Parameters for LCT Access ControlParameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-45


LCT AccessControl Switch

Access AllowedDisable Access

Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In thiscase, when the LCT requests an LCT userto log in to the NE, the NE does not checkthe status of LCT Access ControlSwitch, and directly allows the LCT userto log in to the NE.

l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. Inthis case, when the LCT requests an LCTuser to log in to the NE, the NEdetermines whether to allow the LCTuser to log in to the NE through the LCTaccording to the status of LCT AccessControl Switch.

l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. Inthis case, when the NMS requests anNMS user to log in to the NE, the NMSuser can directly log in to the NE. Afterthe NMS user successfully logs in to theNE, the online LCT user is not affected.

l When both the LCT user and NMS userlog in to the NE, the online LCT user isnot affected after LCT Access ControlSwitch is set to Disable Access.

A.4 Radio Link ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICWorkgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the XPIC tab.3. Click New.

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IF ChannelBandwidth

28M56M

- l This parameter specifies the workingbandwidth of the radio link.

l When this parameter is set to 56M, thehigh-power ODU must be used.

Polarizationdirection-V

- - l This parameter indicates the polarizationdirection of a radio link.

l It is recommended that you set the IF porton the IFX2 board that has a smaller slotnumber to Link ID-V and the IF port onthe other IFX2 board to Link ID-H.

Polarizationdirection-H

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio linksbetween sites from being wronglyconnected.

l When the link ID received by an NE isdifferent from the link ID set for the NE,the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm andinserts the AIS.

l These two parameters are set accordingto the planning information. These twoparameters must be set to differentvalues, but Link ID-V must be set to thesame value at both ends of a link and LinkID-H must also be set to the same valueat both ends of a link.

Link ID-H 2



A-47


Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmitpower of an ODU. The value of thisparameter must not exceed the ratedpower range supported by the ODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU must beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set thisparameter. Ensure that the receive powerof the ODU at the opposite end can ensurestable radio services.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

MaximumTransmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module..

l This parameter is set to limit themaximum transmit power of the ODUwithin this preset range.

l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.


TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the channelcentral frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower transmitfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper transmit frequencylimit supported by the ODU and a half ofthe channel spacing.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventmutual interference between thetransmitter and the receiver.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,the transmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. IfStation Type of the ODU is TX low, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinglower than the receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and the T/R spacingshould be set according to the technicalspecifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, theODU does not transmit microwavesignals but can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute, theODU normally transmits and receivesmicrowave signals.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set tounmute.



A-49


ATPC Enabled DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dBhigher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold at the receiveend, the receiver notifies the transmitterto decrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is 2dB higher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes mustbe consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, setthis parameter to Disabled to ensure thatthe transmit power is not changed. Afterthe commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold is set as the expected receivepower.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC Automatic ThresholdEnable Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theautomatic threshold function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the XPIC tab.


Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

Polarizationdirection-V

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Vcorresponds.

Polarizationdirection-H

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Hcorresponds.

IF ChannelBandwidth

28M56M

- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to thechannel spacing of the correspondingradio links.




A-51


Power to BeReceived -V(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expectedreceive power of the ODU and is mainlyused in the antenna alignment stage.After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, if theactual receive power of the ODU exceedsthe range of receive power±3 dB, theODU LED of the IF board connected tothe ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms andoff for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating thatthe antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.


Power to BeReceived -H(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expectedreceive power of the ODU and is mainlyused in the antenna alignment stage.After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)







Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU shouldbe set to the same value at both ends of aradio link.



TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information.



A-53


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thespacing between the transmit frequencyand receive frequency of the ODU toprevent mutual interference between thetransmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. If theODU is a Tx low station, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, this parameter is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.


l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work butcan normally receive microwave signals.

l If this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally transmit and receivemicrowave signals.


Parameters for Hybrid/AM ConfigurationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

Polarizationdirection

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H or thepolarization direction V corresponds.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


AM Enable Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,the radio link uses only the specifiedmodulation scheme. In this case, youneed to select Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the radio link uses the correspondingmodulation scheme according to thechannel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services andprovide bandwidth adaptively for theEthernet services when the AM function isenabled.

Modulation Modeof the GuaranteedAM Capacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

- This parameter specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacitymust be higher than Modulation Mode of theGuaranteed AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity




This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.



A-55


Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode


QPSK This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.

Guaranteed E1Capacity

- - l When AM Enable Status is set toEnabled, this parameter depends on IFChannel Bandwidth and ModulationMode of the Guaranteed AMCapacity and cannot be set.

l When AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, this parameter depends on IFChannel Bandwidth and ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode and cannotbe set.

E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1services that can be transmitted in Hybridwork mode. The value of this parametercannot exceed the Guaranteed E1Capacity.The E1 Capacity must be set to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

Parameters for ATPC ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and ifthe RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higheror lower than the central value betweenthe ATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold at the receive end, thereceiver notifies the transmitter todecrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is 2dB higher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold.





-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) o the differencebetween the planned central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set this parameter only whenATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Disabled.


-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0



A-57



DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.


l If this parameter is set to Disabled, youneed to manually set ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm).

A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1

Protection from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.

Parameters on the Main Interface


WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.

Enabled EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SDswitching function of N+1 protection isenabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the SD condition is considered as atrigger condition of protection switching.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Enabled.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Slot Mapping Relation ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Select MappingDirection

Work UnitProtection Unit

Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mappingdirection of N+1 protection.


Select MappingWay

- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IFports as Work Unit and map theremaining IF port as Protection Unit.


Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unitand protection unit that have been set.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1


Protection Group ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Protection GroupID

- - This parameter indicates the ID of theprotection group.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies theWTR time.





A-59


SD Enable EnabledDisabled

- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the SD switching function of N+1 protection is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the SD condition is considered as atrigger condition of protection switching.


Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of theswitching control protocol.

Protection Unit ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.

Line - - This parameter indicates the informationabout the working board or protectionboard.

Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.

Remote/Local EndIndication

- - This parameter indicates the local end orremote end.

A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Protection from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l This parameter specifies the workingmode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a1+1 hot standby configuration for the IFboard and ODU at both ends of each hopof a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses twochannels that have a frequency spacingbetween them, to transmit and receive thesame signal. The remote end selectssignals from the two received signals.With FD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l In SD mode, the system uses twoantennas that have a space distancebetween them, to receive the same signal.The equipment selects signals from thetwo received signals. With SD protection,the impact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.


Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-RevertiveMode

Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertivemode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When this parameter is set to RevertiveMode, the NE that is in the switchingstate releases the switching and enablesthe former working channel to return tothe normal state some time after theformer working channel is restored tonormal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive Mode.



A-61


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.


l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode.


Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates whether thereverse switching function is enabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms to thesource end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnabled and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working boardof the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protectionboard of the protection group.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Protection Group ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Protection GroupID


Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l This parameter indicates the workingmode of the created IF 1+1 protectiongroup.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a1+1 hot standby configuration for the IFboard and ODU at both ends of each hopof a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses twochannels that have a frequency spacingbetween them, to transmit and receive thesame signal. The remote end selectssignals from the two received signals.With FD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l In SD mode, the system uses twoantennas that have a space distancebetween them, to receive the same signal.The equipment selects signals from thetwo received signals. With SD protection,the impact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.


Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-RevertiveMode

Revertive Mode l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the protection group.

l When this parameter is set to RevertiveMode, the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive Mode.



A-63


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies theWTR time.


l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode.

l It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the reverse switching function isenabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms to thesource end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnabled and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

Switching Status ofDevice

- - l This parameter indicates the switchingstate on the equipment side.

l Unknown is displayed when theswitching state on the channel side is notqueried or not obtained after a query.

Switching Status ofChannel

- - l This parameter indicates the switchingstate on the channel side.

l Unknown is displayed when theswitching state on the channel side is notqueried or not obtained after a query.

Active Board ofDevice

- - This parameter indicates the currentworking board on the equipment side.

Active Board ofChannel

- - This parameter indicates the currentworking board on the channel side.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Unit - - This parameter indicates the working boardand protection board.

Slot MappingRelation

- - This parameter indicates the names andports of the working board and protectionboard.

Working Status ofDevice

- - This parameter indicates the working stateon the equipment side.

Signal Status ofChannel

- - This parameter indicates the status of thelink signal.

A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.



A-65

Parameters for Configuring the IFParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM

- l This parameter indicates or specifies thework mode of the radio link in "workmode number, service capacity, channelspacing, modulation mode" format.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information. The work modesof the IF boards at the two ends of a radiolink must be the same.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IFU2board and the IFX2 board.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Enable AM DisabledEnabled

Disable l When this parameter is set to Disabled,the radio link uses only the specifiedmodulation scheme. In this case, youneed to select Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the radio link uses the correspondingmodulation scheme according to thechannel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services andprovide bandwidth adaptively for theEthernet services when the AM function isenabled.NOTE

This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Channel Space 7M14M28M56M

7M Channel Space indicates the channelspacing of the corresponding radio link.This parameter is set according to theplanning information.NOTE


GuaranteedCapacityModulation


QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by theservice transmission bandwidth that theHybrid radio must ensure and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.This parameter is valid only when EnableAM is set to Enabled.NOTE




A-67


Full CapacityModulation



Full Capacity Modulation must be higher thanGuaranteed E1 Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when EnableAM is set to Enabled.NOTE


Manually SpecifiedModulation


QPSK This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.

This parameter is valid only when EnableAM is set to Disabled.NOTE



- - l When Enable AM is set to Enabled, thisparameter depends on Channel Spaceand Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is notconfigurable.

l When Enable AM is set to Disabled, thisparameter depends on Channel Spaceand Manually Specified ModulationMode and is not configurable.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Specified Max E1Capacity

- - This parameter specifies the number of E1services that can be transmitted in theHybrid work mode. The value of thisparameter cannot exceed the GuaranteedE1 Capacity.The E1 Capacity must be set to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.NOTE





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies theID of a radio link. As the identifier of aradio link, this parameter is used toprevent incorrect connections of radiolinks between sites.

l If the value of Received Radio Link IDdoes not match the preset value of LinkID at the local end, the local end insertsthe AIS signal to the downstreamdirection of the service. At the same time,the local end reports MW_LIM alarm tothe NMS, indicating that the link IDs donot match.

l Each radio link of an NE should have aunique link ID, and the link IDs at bothends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Link ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates the received ID ofthe radio link.NOTE

When the radio link becomes faulty, thisparameter is displayed as an invalid value.

ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled. If the APTCfunction is enabled, the transmit power ofthe transmitter automatically varieswithin the specified ATPC rangeaccording to the change of the RSL at thereceive end.





l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC



A-69



-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC AutomaticThreshold Enable

EnabledDisabled




Enable IEEE-1588Timeslot

EnabledDisabled

Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected withthe packet radio equipment, this parameteris set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameteris set to Disabled.NOTE





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Configuring the ODUParameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Frequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.


Range of TXFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit frequency of the ODU.

l The Range of Frequency(MHz)depends on the specifications of theODU.

Actual TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmitfrequency of the ODU.

Actual RXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivefrequency of the ODU.



A-71


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventinterference between them.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,the TX frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. IfStation Type of the ODU is TX low, theTX frequency is one T/R spacing lowerthan the receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0, indicatingthat the T/R spacing supported by theODU is used.


l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/Rspacing of the ODU.

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.

l This parameter cannot take a valuegreater than the preset value ofMaximum Transmit Power(dBm).




TX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem separately records the duration




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


TX Low Threshold(dBm)

- - when the value of the actual transmitpower of the ODU is greater than thepreset value of TX High Threshold(dBm) and the duration when the valueof the actual transmit power of the ODUis greater than the preset value of TX LowThreshold(dBm) in the performanceevents.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX Low Threshold(dBm) andis lower than the preset value of TX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records theduration when the value of the actualtransmit power of the ODU is greater thanthe preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is lower than the preset valueof TX Low Threshold(dBm), the systemdoes not record it.

l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX LowThreshold(dBm) are valid only when theATPC function is enabled.

RX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is lower than the preset value ofRX Low Threshold(dBm), the systemrecords the duration when the value of theactual receive power of the ODU is lowerthan the preset value of RX LowThreshold(dBm) and duration when thevalue of the actual transmit power of theODU is lower than the preset value of RXHigh Threshold(dBm)in theperformance events.

l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is greater than the preset valueof RX Low Threshold(dBm) and islower than the preset value of RX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records theduration when the value of the actualreceive power of the ODU is Lower thanthe preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is greater than the preset value



A-73


RX Low Threshold(dBm)

- - of RX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem does not record it.

Power to BeReceived(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expectedreceive power of the ODU and is mainlyused in the antenna alignment stage. Afterthis parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.



l This parameter needs to be according tothe planning.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module.




Range of TXPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actualtransmit power of the ODU.

l If the ATPC function is enabled, thequeried actual transmit power may bedifferent from the preset value.

Actual RX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivepower of the ODU.

TX Status UnmuteMute

Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l When this parameter is set to Mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work butcan normally receive microwave signals.

l When this parameter is set to Unmute,the ODU can normally transmit andreceive microwave signals.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to unmute.

Actual TX Status UnmuteMute

- This parameter indicates the actual transmitstatus of the ODU.

Equipment InformationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency bandwhere the ODU operates.



A-75


Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmissioncapacity only and is irrelevant to the typeof transmitted service.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.

l The transmit frequency of a Tx highstation is one T/R spacing higher than thetransmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingserial number and the manufacturer code ofthe ODU.

TransmissionPower Type

- - This parameter indicates the level of theoutput power of the ODU.

A.5 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear

MS from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Protection Type 1+1 Protection1:N Protection

1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protectiontype of the linear MSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, oneworking channel and one protectionchannel are required. When the workingchannel fails, the service is switched fromthe working channel to the protectionchannel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N workingchannels and one protection channel arerequired. Normal services are transmittedon the working channels and extraservices are transmitted on the protectionchannel. When one working channelfails, the services are switched from thisworking channel to the protectionchannel, and the extra services areinterrupted.

l If extra services need to be transmitted orseveral working channels are required,select 1:N Protection.


Switching Mode Single-EndedSwitchingDual-EndedSwitching

Single-EndedSwitching (1+1Protection)Dual-EndedSwitching (1:NProtection)

l This parameter specifies the switchingmode of the linear MSP.

l In single-ended mode, the switchingoccurs only at one end and the state of theother end remains unchanged.

l In dual-ended mode, the switching occursat both ends at the same time.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Switching Mode can be setto Dual-Ended Switching only.



A-77


Revertive Mode Non-RevertiveRevertive

Non-Revertive (1+1Protection)Revertive (1:NProtection)

l This parameter specifies the revertivemode of the linear MSP.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Revertive Mode can be setto Revertive only.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.



Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the switching at the SD alarm ofthe linear MSP is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the B2_SD alarm is considered as aswitching condition.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Protocol Type New ProtocolRestructure Protocol

New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the earlystage, and the mainstream protocolversion is used currently.

l The restructure protocol optimizes thenew protocol and provides bettermeasures to protect the new protocol,thus ensuring that the new protocol runsin a better manner.

l The new protocol is more mature, and therestructure protocol complies with thestandard. It is recommended that you usethe new protocol.

l You must ensure that the interconnectedNEs run the protocols of the same type.


Select MappingDirection

West Working UnitWest ProtectionUnit

West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mappingdirection of the linear MSP.

Select MappingMode

- - l This parameter specifies the mappingboard and port in the mapping direction.

l If the protection type is set to 1+1Protection, only one line port can bemapped as West Working Unit.

l Only one line port can be mapped as WestProtection Unit.

l The line port mapped as West ProtectionUnit and the line port mapped as WestWorking Unit should be configured fordifferent boards if possible.

Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slotmapping relations, including the mappingdirection and the corresponding mappingmode.

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.



A-79

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MSfrom the Function Tree.


Protection GroupID


Protection Type 1+1 Protection1:N Protection

- l This parameter indicates the protectiontype of the linear MSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, oneworking channel and one protectionchannel are required. When the workingchannel fails, the service is switched fromthe working channel to the protectionchannel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N workingchannels and one protection channel arerequired. Normal services are transmittedon the working channels and extraservices are transmitted on the protectionchannel. When one working channelfails, the services are switched from thisworking channel to the protectionchannel, and the extra services areinterrupted.

l If extra services need to be transmitted orseveral working channels are required,select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode Single-EndedSwitchingDual-EndedSwitching

- l This parameter indicates or specifies theswitching mode of the linear MSP.

l In single-ended mode, the switchingoccurs only at one end and the state of theother end remains unchanged.

l In dual-ended mode, the switching occursat both ends at the same time.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Switching Mode can be setto Dual-Ended Switching only.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



- l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the linear MSP.

l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.


l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Revertive Mode can be setto Revertive only.






- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the reverse switching function isenabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the B2_SD alarm is considered as aswitching condition.




A-81


Protocol Type New ProtocolRestructure Protocol

- l The new protocol is supported at the earlystage, and the mainstream protocolversion is used currently.

l The restructure protocol optimizes thenew protocol and provides bettermeasures to protect the new protocol,thus ensuring that the new protocol runsin a better manner.

l You must ensure that the interconnectedNEs run the protocols of the same type.

l The new protocol is more mature, and therestructure protocol complies with thestandard. It is recommended that you usethe new protocol.

Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol statusof the linear MSP.


Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of theunits, namely, the west protection unit or thewest working unit, is currently in theprotection status.

West Line --

- This parameter indicates the west protectionunit and the west working unit of the linearMSP.

West SwitchingStatus

- - This parameter indicates the switchingstatus of the line.

Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the workingchannel protected by the current protectionchannel.

Remote/Local EndIndication

- - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-Ended Switching, the central office endthat issues the switching command isdisplayed.

A.6 SDH/PDH Service ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services IntoSNCP ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCPservices.

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,configuring cross-connections).

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

Navigation Pathl Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.l Click Create.


Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of theservice to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, set this parameter toVC4.



A-83


Direction BidirectionalUnidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create only the cross-connections from the service source to theservice sink.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to theservice sink and the cross-connectionsfrom the service sink to the servicesource.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice source.

Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the servicesource is located.

l This parameter cannot be set whenSource Slot is set to the slot of thetributary board.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange of the service source.

l This parameter can be set to a number orseveral numbers. When setting thisparameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) torepresent a consecutive number. Forexample, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.


Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the service sinkis located.

l This parameter cannot be set when SinkSlot is set to the slot of the tributary board.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter specifies the timeslotrange of the service sink.



ActivateImmediately

YesNo

Yes l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredservice.

l To immediately deliver the configuredSDH service to the NE, set this parameterto Yes.

A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCPService Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

Navigation Pathl Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.l Click Create SNCP Service.


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of theservice to be created is SNCP.



A-85


Direction BidirectionalUnidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create only the cross-connections from the SNCP servicesource to the SNCP service sink.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the SNCP servicesource to the service sink and the cross-connections from the SNCP service sinkto the service source.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of theSCNP service to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, set this parameter toVC4.

Hold-off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration ofthe hold-off time.

l When a line is faulty, SNCP switchingcan be performed on the NE after a delayof time to prevent the situation where theNE performs SNCP switching and otherprotection switching at the same time.

l If multiple link-based protectionschemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,and N+1 protection, are available at thesame time, the hold-off time needs to beset to a duration that is longer than theswitching duration for the multiple link-based protection schemes.

l If only the SNCP scheme is available, itis recommended that you set the hold-offtime to 0.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether toswitch the service to the original workingchannel after the fault is rectified.

l If this parameter is set to Revertive, theservice is switched from the protectionchannel to the original working channel.If this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the service is not switchedfrom the protection channel to theoriginal working channel.
















A-87








Configure SNCPTangent Ring

SelectedDeselected

Deselected l After the Configure SNCP TangentRing checkbox is selected, you canquickly configure the SNCP service forthe SNCP ring tangent point.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou do not select this checkbox.

ActivateImmediately

SelectedDeselected

Selected l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredSNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediatelycheckbox is selected, you canimmediately activate the created SNCPservice.

A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH ServiceConfiguration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services

This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCPservices.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-

click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert toSNCP Service from the shortcut menu.


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of theservice to be created is SNCP.

Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of theSNCP service.

Level VC12VC3VC4

- l This parameter indicates the level of theSNCP service.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, the parameter value is VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, the parametervalue is VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, the parameter value isVC4.


0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration ofthe hold-off time.






A-89



Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether toswitch the service to the original workingchannel after the fault is rectified. If thisparameter is set to "Revertive", theservice is switched from the protectionchannel to the original working channel.

















Issue 03 (2010-01-30)









Configure SNCPTangent Ring

SelectedDeselected

Deselected l After the Configure SNCP TangentRing checkbox is selected, you canquickly configure the SNCP service forthe SNCP ring tangent point.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou do not select this checkbox.

ActivateImmediately

SelectedDeselected

Selected l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredSNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediatelycheckbox is selected, you canimmediately activate the created SNCPservice.

A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,configuring cross-connections).

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.



A-91

Cross-Connection ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12VC3VC4

- l This parameter indicates the level of theservice.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, VC12 is displayed.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, VC3 isdisplayed.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, VC4 is displayed.

Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of theservice source.

Source Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of thesource sink.

Sink Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service sink.

Activation Status YesNo

- This parameter indicates whether to activatethe service.

Bound GroupNumber


Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections


Level VC12VC3VC4





Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of theservice source.

Source Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of thesource sink.

Sink Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service sink.

Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP ServiceControl from the Function Tree.



Service Type - - This parameter indicates the serviceprotection type of the protection group.



A-93


Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots wherethe working service source and protectionservice source of the protection group arelocated.

Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots wherethe working service sink and protectionservice sink of the protection group arelocated.

Level VC12VC3VC4





Current Status - - This parameter indicates the currentswitching mode and switching status of theservices of the protection group.

Revertive Mode RevertiveNon-Revertive

- l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the service.

l This parameter determines whether toswitch the service from the protectionchannel to the original working channelafter the fault is rectified.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)







0 to 100 - l This parameter indicates or specifies theduration of the hold-off time.






A-95


InitiationCondition

TIMEXCSDUNEQNull

Null l This parameter indicates or specifies theconditions that trigger the protectionswitching of the service.

l If TIM is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarmas an automatic switching condition.

l If EXC is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the B3_EXC or BIP_EXCalarm as an automatic switchingcondition.

l If SD is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm asan automatic switching condition.

l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQalarm as an automatic switchingcondition.

l It is recommended that you set InitiationCondition to the same condition forWorking Service and ProtectionService.

l The protection switching conditions inInitiation Condition are optional valuesnot included in the default values, andthey are set according to the planninginformation.

Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of theworking service and protection service ofthe protection group.

Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support thisparameter.

Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether theworking service or protection service iscurrently received by the protection group.

A.7 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock SubnetThis topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.

A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source SwitchingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock SourceThis topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clocksource.

A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Clock Source Priority.2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.



A-97


Clock Source - - l External clock source 1indicates the externalclock source at theCLK or TIME port onthe CSTA, CSHA,CSHB, or CSHC boardin physical slot 1.

l The internal clocksource is always at thelowest priority andindicates that the NEworks in the free-runmode.

l The clock sources andthe correspondingclock source prioritylevels are determinedaccording to the clocksynchronizationschemes.

External Clock SourceMode

2Mbit/s2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameterindicates the type of theexternal clock sourcesignal.

l This parameter is setaccording to theexternal clock signal.In normal cases, theexternal clock signal isa 2 Mbit/s signal.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is validonly when ExternalClock Source Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameterindicates which bit ofthe TS0 in odd framesof the external clocksignal is used totransmit the SSM.

l This parameter needs tobe set only when theSSM or extended SSMis enabled. In normalcases, the externalclock sources use theSA4 to transmit theSSM.

Clock Source PrioritySequence (1 is thehighest)

- - Displays the prioritysequence of clock sources.1 indicates the highestclock source priority.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock SubnetThis topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.


Clock Subnet Configuration.

2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.

Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet


Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is usedwhen the clock subnetneeds to be created onthe NMS.

l The NEs that trace thesame clock sourceshould be allocatedwith the same clocksubnet ID.



A-99


Protection Status Start Extended SSMProtocolStart Standard SSMProtocolStop SSM Protocol

Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is ascheme used forsynchronousmanagement on anSDH network andindicates that the SSMis passed by the lowerfour bits of the S1 byteand can be exchangedbetween the nodes. TheSSM protocol ensuresthat the equipmentautomatically selectsthe clock source of thehighest quality andhighest priority, thuspreventing mutualclock tracing.

l After the standard SSMprotocol is started, theNE first performs theprotection switching onthe clock sourceaccording to the clockquality levelinformation providedby the S1 byte. If thequality level of theclock source is thesame, the NE thenperforms the protectionswitching according tothe clock priority table.That is, the NE selectsan unlocked clocksource that is of thehighest quality andhighest priority from allthe current availableclock sources as theclock source to besynchronized andtraced by the localstation.

l If the SSM protocol isstopped, it indicatesthat the S1 byte is notused. The NE selectsand switches a clock




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


source only accordingto the sequencespecified in the prioritytable. The clock sourceof the highest priority isused as the clock sourceto be traced.

l After the SSM protocolis stopped, each NEperforms the protectionswitching on the clockaccording to the presetpriority table of theclock source only whenthe clock source of ahigher priority is lost.

Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source that isconfigured for an NE. InClock Source Priority,you can set whether to addor delete a clock source.



A-101


Clock Source ID (None)1 to 15

(None) l This parameter is validonly when the extendedSSM protocol isstarted.

l Clock source IDs areallocated for thefollowing clocksources only:– External clock

source– Internal clock source

of the node thataccesses the externalclock sources

– Internal clock sourceof the joint node of aring and a chain orthe joint node of tworings

– Line clock sourcethat enters the ringwhen the intra-ringline clock source isconfigured at thejoint node of a ringand a chain or thejoint node of tworings

A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock QualityThis topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.


Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the Clock Quality tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Clock Source QualityParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe name of theconfigured clock source.In Clock SourcePriority, you can setwhether to add or delete aclock source.

Configuration Quality UnknownSynchronization QualityG.811 Clock SignalG.812 Transit ClockSignalG.812 Local Clock SignalG.813 SDH EquipmentTiming Source (SETS)SignalDo Not Use ForSynchronizationAutomatic Extraction

Automatic Extraction This parameter specifiesthe quality level that isconfigured for the clocksource. This function isrequired only in a specialscenario or in a test.Generally, this parameterneed not be set.

Clock Quality - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source qualitysignal received by the NE.The NE extracts the clocksource quality signal fromthe S1 byte of each clocksource.

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality LevelParameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-103


Manual Setting of 0Quality Level

Do Not Use ForSynchronizationG.811 Reference ClockBetween G.811 ReferenceClock and G.812 TransitClockG.812 Transit ClockBetween G.812 TransitClock and G.812 LocalClockG.812 Local ClockBetween G.812 LocalClock and synchronousequipment timing source(SETS)SETS ClockBetween synchronousequipment timing source(SETS) and qualityunavailable

Do Not Use ForSynchronization

This parameter specifiesthe clock quality whoselevel is manually set tozero.l Do Not Use For

Synchronization: thenotificationinformation in thereverse direction of theselectedsynchronization clocksource to avoid directmutual locking ofadjacent NEs.

l G.811 ReferenceClock: the clock signalspecified in ITU-T G.811.

l Between G.811Reference Clock andG.812 Transit Clock:lower than the qualitylevel of the clock signalspecified in ITU-T G.811 but higher than thequality level of thetransit exchange clocksignal specified in ITU-T G.812.

l G.812 Transit Clock:the transit exchangeclock signal specifiedin ITU-T G.812.

l Between G.812 TransitClock and G.812 LocalClock: lower than thequality level of thetransit exchange clocksignal specified in ITU-T G.812 but higher thanthe quality level of thelocal exchange clocksignal specified in ITU-T G.812.

l G.812 Local Clock: thelocal exchange clocksignal specified in ITU-T G.812.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


l Between G.812 LocalClock and synchronousequipment timingsource (SETS): lowerthan the quality level ofthe local exchangeclock signal specifiedin ITU-T G.812 buthigher than the qualitylevel of the clock signalof the SETS.

l SETS Clock: the clocksignal of the SETS.

l Between synchronousequipment timingsource (SETS) andquality unavailable:lower than the qualitylevel of the clock signalof the SETS but higherthan the quality levelunavailable in thesynchronous timingsource.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM OutputControl

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.


Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.



A-105


Line Port - - l This parameterindicates the name ofthe line clock port.

l Line Port: indicatesthe SSM qualityinformation output portof the current availableline clock source andthe external clocksource. This output portcan transmit the qualityinformation of theclock source byoutputting the S1 byteto the downstream NE.

Control Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter is validonly when the SSMprotocol or theextended SSM protocolis started.

l This parameterindicates whether theSSM is output at theline port.

l When the line port isconnected to an NE inthe same clock subnet,set this parameter toEnabled. Otherwise,set this parameter toDisabled.

A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock IDEnabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.


Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters


Line Port - - l This parameterindicates the name ofthe line clock port.

l Line Port: indicatesthe SSM qualityinformation output portof the current availableline clock source andthe external clocksource. This output portcan transmit the qualityinformation of theclock source byoutputting the S1 byteto the downstream NE.

Enabled Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter is validonly when the extendedSSM protocol isstarted.

l This parameterindicates whether theclock source ID isoutput at the line port.

l If the line ports areconnected to the NEs inthe same clock subnetand if the extendedSSM protocol is startedon the opposite NE, thisparameter is set toEnabled. Otherwise,this parameter is set toDisabled.

A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_ClockSource Restoration Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.


Clock Source Switching.

2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.



A-107



Higher Priority ClockSource Reversion Mode

Auto-RevertiveNon-Revertive

Auto-Revertive l When the quality of ahigher-priority clocksource degrades, theNE automaticallyswitches the clocksource to a lower-priority clock source. Ifthis parameter is set toAuto-Revertive, theNE automaticallyswitches the clocksource to the higher-priority clock sourcewhen this higher-priority clock sourcerestores. If thisparameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE doesnot automaticallyswitch the clock sourceto the higher-priorityclock source when thishigher-priority clocksource restores.

l Correct setting ofClock SourceSwitching Conditionensures the reliabilityof the clock sourceswitching. To improvethe clock quality, selectAuto-Revertive.Otherwise, to preventjitter of the clock,generally, it isrecommended that youset this parameter toNon-Revertive.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Clock Source WTRTime(min.)

0 to 12 5 l This parameterspecifies the durationfrom the time when theclock sourcerestoration is detectedto the time when theclock source switchingis triggered. Thisparameter is used toavoid frequentswitching of the clocksource due tounstability of the clocksource state within ashort time.

l This parameter is validonly when HigherPriority Clock SourceReversion Mode is setto Auto-Revertive.

A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_ClockSource Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.


Clock Source Switching.2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.


Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the clocksource.

Effective Status ValidInvalid

- This parameter indicateswhether the clock sourceis valid.



A-109


Lock Status LockUnlock

- l This parameterspecifies the lockingstatus of the clocksource in the prioritytable.

l Lock: A clock source inthe priority table is inthe locked state. Theclock source in thelocked state cannot beswitched.

l Unlock: A clock sourcein the priority table is inthe unlocked state. Theclock source in theunlocked state can beswitched.

Switching Source - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source to betraced by the NE after theswitching.

Switching Status NormalManual SwitchingForced Switching

- This parameter indicatesthe switching status of thecurrent clock source.

A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of theExternal Clock Source

This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clocksource.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.

Parameters


2M Phase-LockedSource Number

External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicatesthe number of the externalclock source output of theNE.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


External Clock OutputMode

2Mbit/s2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameterspecifies the mode ofthe output clock.

l This parameter needs tobe set according to therequirements of theinterconnectedequipment. Generally,the output externalclock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

External Clock OutputTimeslot

SA4 to SA8ALL

ALL l This parameter is validonly when ExternalClock Output Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameterindicates which bit ofthe TS0 in odd framesof the output clocksignal is used totransmit the SSM.

l If this parameter is setto ALL, it indicatesthat all the bits of theTS0 are used totransmit the SSM.




A-111


External Source OutputThreshold

Threshold DisabledNot Inferior to G.813SETS SignalNot Inferior to G.812Local SignalNot Inferior to G.812Transit Clock SignalNot Inferior to G.811Clock Signal

Threshold Disabled l This parameterspecifies the lowestquality of the outputclock. If the clockquality is lower than thevalue of this parameter,it indicates that theexternal clock sourcedoes not output anyclock signal.

l If this parameter is setto ThresholdDisabled, it indicatesthat the external clocksource always outputsthe clock signal.


2M Phase-LockedSource Fail Condition

No Failure ConditionAISLOFAIS OR LOF

No Failure Condition l This parameterspecifies the failurecondition of the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clocksource.


2M Phase-LockedSource Fail Action

Shut Down Output2M Output S1 ByteUnavailableSend AIS

Shut Down Output l This parameter is validonly when 2M Phase-Locked Source FailCondition is not set toNo Failure Condition.

l This parameterspecifies the operationof the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked loop (PLL)when the 2 Mbit/sphase-locked clocksource meets the failureconditions.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > ClockSynchronization Status.



NE Clock WorkingMode

- - This parameter indicatesthe working mode of theNE clock.

S1 Byte SynchronizationQuality Information

- - This parameter indicatesthe synchronizationquality information of theS1 byte.

S1 Byte SynchronousSource

- - This parameter indicatesthe clock synchronizationsource of the S1 byte.

Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicatesthe synchronizationsource.



A-113


Data Output Method inHoldover Mode

Normal Data OutputModeKeep the Latest Data

Normal Data OutputMode

l When all the referencetiming signals are lost,the slave clock changesto the holdover mode.At this time, the slaveclock works based onthe latest frequencyinformation storedbefore the referencetiming signals are lost.Then, the frequency ofthe oscillator driftsslowly to ensure thatthe offset between thefrequency of the slaveclock and the referencefrequency is verysmall. As a result, theimpact caused by thedrift is limited withinthe specifiedrequirement.

l Normal Data OutputMode: The slave clockworks based on thelatest frequencyinformation storedbefore the referencetiming signals are lost,and the holdoverduration depends on thesize of the phase-locked clock register onthe equipment. Theholdover duration canbe up to 24 hours.

l Keep the Latest Data:The slave clock worksin holdover mode allthe time based on thelatest frequencyinformation storedbefore the referencetiming signals are lost.

A.8 Parameters for Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_CreationThis topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)service.

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_CreationThis topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)service.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the E-Lineservice.

Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-Lineservice.

Direction UNI-UNIUNI-NNINNI-NNI

UNI-UNI l This parameterspecifies the directionof the E-Line service.




A-115


BPDU Not TransparentlyTransmittedTransparentlyTransmitted

Not TransparentlyTransmitted

l This parameterspecifies thetransparenttransmission ID of thebridge protocol dataunit (BPDU) packets. Itis used to indicatewhether the E-Lineservice transparentlytransmits the BPDUpackets.

l If the BPDU packetsare used as the servicepackets andtransparentlytransmitted to theopposite end, set thisparameter toTransparentlyTransmitted.

l In other cases, set thisparameter to NotTransparentlyTransmitted.


MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Source Port - - l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-UNI orUNI-NNI.

l Before setting thisparameter, check andensure that theattributes in EthernetInterface of the portare set correctly and arethe same as theplanning information.

l The value of thisparameter cannot be thesame as the value ofsink port.

l The value of thisparameter cannot beused for the E-LANport.




A-117


Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can beset to null, a number, orseveral numbers. Whensetting this parameterto several numbers, usethe comma (,) toseparate the discretenumbers, or use theendash (-) to representa consecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-UNI orUNI-NNI.

l The number of VLANsmust be the same valueof Sink VLANs.Otherwise, you need tocreate a VLANforwarding table forswapping VLAN IDs.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesat the source port areused as the servicesource.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesource port can be usedas the service source.

Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Lineservice.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-NNI.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


QinQ Link ID - - l Selects the QinQ linkID.

l A QinQ link ID ispreset in QinQ Link.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-NNI.

Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Lineservice.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to NNI-NNI.

QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ linkID of the first QinQlink.


l The QinQ link ID ispreset in QinQ Link.

Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Lineservice.


QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ linkID of the second QinQlink.


l The QinQ link ID ispreset in QinQ Link.



A-119


Sink Port - - l Before setting thisparameter, check andensure that theattributes in EthernetInterface of the portare set correctly and arethe same as theplanning information.

l The value of thisparameter cannot be thesame as the value ofSource Port.

l The value of thisparameter cannot beused for the E-LANport.


Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can beset to null, a number, orseveral numbers. Whensetting this parameterto several numbers, usethe comma (,) toseparate the discretenumbers, or use theendash (-) to representa consecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l The number of VLANsmust be the same valueof Source VLANs.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesat the sink port are usedas the service sink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesink port can be used asthe service sink.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the E-Lineservice.

Service Name - - This parameter indicatesor specifies the name ofthe E-Line service.

Source Node - - This parameter indicatesthe source node.

Sink Node - - This parameter indicatesthe sink node.


MTU(byte) 1518 to 9600 - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.



A-121


BPDU Not TransparentlyTransmittedTransparentlyTransmitted

- l This parameterindicates thetransparenttransmission tag of thebridge protocol dataunit (BPDU) packets.This parameter is usedto indicate whether theEthernet linetransparently transmitsthe BPDU packets.

l If the BPDU packetsare used as the servicepackets andtransparentlytransmitted to theopposite end, set thisparameter toTransparentlyTransmitted.

l If the BPDU packetsare used as the protocolpackets to compute thespanning tree topologyof the network, set thisparameter to NotTransparentlyTransmitted.

Active ActiveInactive

- This parameter indicateswhether E-Line service isactive.

Parameters Associated with UNI PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe UNI port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicatesor specifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.l This parameter can be

set to null, a number, orseveral numbers. Whensetting this parameterto several numbers, usethe comma (,) toseparate the discretenumbers, or use theendash (-) to representa consecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-UNI orUNI-NNI in theprocess of creating anE-Line service.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesof the UNI work as theservice source orservice sink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservices of the UNI portwhose VLAN IDs areincluded in the setvalue of this parameterwork as the servicesource or service sink.



A-123

Parameters Associated with NNI PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameterindicates the QinQ linkID of the QinQ linkconnected to the NNIport.


Port - - l This parameterindicates the NNI port.


S-VLAN ID - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe VLAN ID of theNNI port.

l This parameter is validonly when Direction isset to UNI-NNI orNNI-NNI in theprocess of creating anE-Line service.

l This parameter is presetin QinQ Link.

Parameters for the Port AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe QinQ link ID of theQinQ link connected tothe port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Enable Port - - l This parameterindicates whether toenable the port.

l This parameter is presetin General Attributesof Ethernet Interface.

Encapsulation Type Null802.1QQinQ

- l This parameterindicates theencapsulation type ofthe port.


l If this parameter is setto Null, the porttransparently transmitsthe received packets.

l If this parameter is setto 802.1Q, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1Q standard.

l If this parameter is setto QinQ, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1 QinQstandard.

l This parameter is presetin General Attributesof Ethernet Interface.

TAG Tag AwareAccessHybrid

l This parameterindicates the tag of theport.

l This parameter is presetin Layer 2 Attributesof EthernetInterface .



A-125

A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding TableItem_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.


Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table ItemParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifiesthe network attribute ofthe source interface.

Source Interface - - This parameter specifiesthe source interface.

Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID of thesource service.

Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifiesthe network attribute ofthe sink interface.

Sink Interface - - This parameter specifiesthe sink interface.

Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID of the sinkservice.

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item iscreated. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified inSink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.

l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted fromSource VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when theother VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.

l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion ofVLAN IDs.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.2. Click New.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameterspecifies the ID of theE-LAN service.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports simultaneouscreation of an E-LANservice only.

Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-LANservice.

BPDU - - l This parameterindicates thetransparenttransmission tag of theBPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-LAN service, thisparameter supportsonly transparenttransmission of theBPDU packets andcannot be set manually.

l Not TransparentlyTransmitted indicatesthat the BPDU packetsare used as the protocolpackets to compute thespanning tree topologyof the network.



A-127


Tag Type C-AwaredS-AwaredTag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to C-Tag (the VLAN tag onthe client-side). Tocreate the 802.1qbridge, set thisparameter to C-Awared.

l S-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to S-Tag (the VLAN tag atthe carrier servicelayer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set thisparameter to S-Awared.

l Tag-Transparentindicates that only theEthernet packets thatdo not contain VLANtags are accessed. Tocreate the 802.1dbridge, set thisparameter to Tag-Transparent.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Self-Learning MACAddress

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the MACaddress self-learningfunction.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isenabled, the EthernetLAN learns an MACaddress according tothe original MACaddress in the packetand automaticallyrefreshes the MACaddress forwardingtable.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isdisabled, a static MACaddress forwardingtable needs to beconfigured. Otherwise,the Ethernet LAN failsto forward the services.

MAC Address LearningMode

- - l This parameterindicates the mode usedto learn an MACaddress.

l When the bridge usesthe SVL mode, all theVLANs share oneMAC address table. Ifthe bridge uses the IVLmode, each VLAN hasan MAC address table.





A-129

Parameters for UNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.

l This parameter is validonly when Tag Type isset to S-Awared.


VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.

l This parameter can beset to null, a number, orseveral numbers. Whensetting this parameterto several numbers, usethe comma (,) toseparate the discretenumbers, or use theendash (-) to representa consecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesof the UNI work as theservice source orservice sink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservices of the UNI portwhose VLAN IDs areincluded in the setvalue of this parameterwork as the servicesource or service sink.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters of NNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description



SVLANs - - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the NNI port.


Parameters for the Split Horizon GroupParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameterindicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.

l The default splithorizon group ID is 1and cannot be setmanually.



A-131


Split Horizon GroupMember

- - l A split horizon groupmember indicates thelogical port member inthe split horizon group.

l The port members thatare added to the samesplit horizon groupcannot communicatewith each other.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports only thedivision of the splithorizon groupmembers according tothe Ethernet physicalport.

l If a UNI or NNI logicalport of the 802.1adbridge is added to asplit horizon groupmember, the physicalport that is mountedwith the logical port isautomatically added tothe split horizon groupmember.

A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameterindicates the ID of theE-LAN service.

l The supportssimultaneous creationof an E-LAN serviceonly.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-LANservice.

BPDU - - l This parameterindicates thetransparenttransmission tag of theBPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-LAN service, thisparameter supportsonly transparenttransmission of theBPDU packets andcannot be set manually.

l Not TransparentlyTransmitted indicatesthat the BPDU packetsare used as the protocolpackets to compute thespanning tree topologyof the network.



A-133


Tag Type C-AwaredS-AwaredTag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to C-Tag (the VLAN tag onthe client-side). Tocreate the 802.1qbridge, set thisparameter to C-Awared.

l S-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to S-Tag (the VLAN tag atthe carrier servicelayer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set thisparameter to S-Awared.

l Tag-Transparentindicates that only theEthernet packets thatdo not contain VLANtags are accessed. Tocreate the 802.1dbridge, set thisparameter to S-Awared.

Self-Learning MACAddress

Enabled Enabled l This parameterindicates whether toenable the MACaddress self-learningfunction.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isenabled, the EthernetLAN learns an MACaddress according tothe original MACaddress in the packetand automaticallyrefreshes the MACaddress forwardingtable.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


MAC Address LearningMode

- - l This parameterindicates the mode usedto learn an MACaddress.

l When the bridge usesthe SVL mode, all theVLANs share oneMAC address table. Ifthe bridge uses the IVLmode, each VLAN hasan MAC address table.



Parameters for UNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.





A-135


VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.


l If this parameter is setto null, the E-LANservice exclusivelyuses the correspondingUNI physical port. Thatis, the entire port ismounted to the bridge.

l If this parameter is setto a non-null value,only the correspondingUNI port whose servicepackets contain thisVLAN ID works as thelogical port and ismounted to the bridge.

Parameters for NNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


SVLANs - - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.



Parameters for Static MAC AddressesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter isinvalid if MACAddress LearningMode is SVL. That is,the preset static MACaddress entries arevalid for all VLANs.

l If MAC AddressLearning Mode is setto IVL, the preset staticMAC address entriesare valid for only theVLANs whose VLANID is equal to the presetVLAN ID.




A-137


MAC Address - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe static MACaddress.

l A static MAC addressis an address that is setmanually. It is not agedautomatically andneeds to be deletedmanually.

l Generally, a staticMAC address is usedfor the port thatreceives but does notforward Ethernetservice packets or theport whose MACaddress need not beaged automatically.

Egress Interface - - l This parameterspecifies the Ethernetport that corresponds tothe MAC address.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC AddressParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter isinvalid if MACAddress LearningMode is SVL. That is,the preset self-learningMAC address entriesare valid for allVLANs.

l If MAC AddressLearning Mode is setto IVL, the preset self-learning MAC addressentries are valid foronly the VLANs whoseVLAN ID is equal tothe preset VLAN ID.


MAC Address - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe self-learning MACaddress. A self-learning MAC addressis also called a dynamicMAC address.

l A self-learning MACaddress is an entryobtained by a bridge inSVL or IVL learningmode. A self-learningMAC address can beaged.

Egress Interface - - l This parameterspecifies the Ethernetport that corresponds tothe MAC address.




A-139

Parameters Associated with MAC Address LearningParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Aging Ability EnabledDisabled

Enabled The OptiX RTN 910supports enabling/disabling of the agingfunction and aging timefor the MAC addresstable.If one routing entry is notupdated in a certainperiod, that is, if no newpacket from this MACaddress is received toenable the re-learning ofthis MAC address, thisrouting entry isautomatically deleted.This mechanism is calledaging, and this period iscalled aging time. Theaging time of a MACaddress table is 5 minutesby default.

Aging Time(min) - 5

Parameters for Disabled MAC AddressesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - 1 This parameter indicatesor specifies the VLAN IDof the service. A disabledMAC address is valid forthe VLAN whose VLANID is equal to the presetVLAN ID.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


MAC Address - - l This parameterspecifies or indicatesthe disabled MACaddress. A disabledMAC address is alsocalled a blacklistedMAC address.

l This parameter is usedfor discarding an entry,also called a black holeentry, whose dataframe that contains aspecific destinationMAC address. Adisabled MAC addressneeds to be setmanually and cannot beaged.

Parameters for Unknown Frame ProcessingParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Frame Type UnicastMulticast

1 This parameter indicatesthe type of the receivedunknown frame.

Handing Mode DiscardBroadcast

Broadcast Selects the method ofprocessing the unknownframe. If this parameter isset to Discard, theunknown frame is directlydiscarded. If thisparameter is set toBroadcast, the unknownframe is broadcast at theforwarding port.



A-141

Parameters for the Split Horizon GroupParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameterindicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.

l The default splithorizon group ID is 1and cannot be setmanually.

Split Horizon GroupMember

- - l A split horizon groupmember indicates thelogical port member inthe split horizon group.

l The port members thatare added to differentsplit horizon groupscannot communicatewith each other.

l The supports only thedivision of the splithorizon groupmembers according tothe Ethernet physicalport.

l If a UNI or NNI logicalport of the 802.1adbridge is added to asplit horizon groupmember, the physicalport that is mountedwith the logical port isautomatically added tothe split horizon groupmember.

Maintenance Association ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

MaintenanceDomain Name

- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created maintenanceassociation.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


MaintenanceAssociation Name

- - l This parameter specifies the name of themaintenance association, which is adomain related to a service. Throughmaintenance association division, theconnectivity check (CC) can beperformed on the network that transmitsa service instance.

l This parameter can contain a maximumof eight bytes.

CC Test TransmitPeriod

1s10s1m10m

1s l This parameter specifies the interval fortransmitting packets in the CC test.

l The CC is performed to check theavailability of the service.

Parameters for the MEPParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created MEP.


- - This parameter indicates the maintenanceassociation of the created MEP.

Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID ofthe current service.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured withan MEP ID, which is unique in themaintenance association. The MEP ID isrequired in the OAM operation.

Direction IngressEgress

Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction ofthe MEP.

l "Ingress" indicates the direction in whichthe packets are transmitted to the port,and "Egress" indicates the direction inwhich the packets are transmitted fromthe port.

CC Status ActiveInactive

Active l This parameter specifies whether toenable the CC function of the MEP.

l In the case of the tests based on the MPIDs, CC Status must be set to Active.



A-143

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.


Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.2. Click New.

Parameters for the General AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the QinQ link.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910supports 1024 QinQ links,whose IDs must be differentfrom each other.

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where the QinQlink is located.

Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port where the QinQlink is located.

S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN ID(at the networkoperator side) for theQinQ link.


A.9 Ethernet Protocol ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)management.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CISTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTPCIST.

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.

A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be QuicklyDeletedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.

A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol routemanagement.

A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.

A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member PortManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of theIGMP Snooping protocol.

A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group MemberCreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.

A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data StatisticsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMPSnooping protocol.

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port PriorityThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.

A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.



A-145


Protection > ERPS Management.2. Click New.


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameterspecifies the ID of theEthernet ringprotection switching(ERPS) instance.

l The IDs of ERPSinstances on an NEmust be different fromeach other.

East Port - - This parameter specifiesthe east port of the ERPSinstance.

West Port - - This parameter specifiesthe west port of the ERPSinstance.

RPLOwner Ring NodeFlag

YesNo

No l This parameterspecifies whether thenode on the ring is thering protection link(RPL) owner.

l Only one node on thering can be set as theRPL owner for eachEthernet ring.

RPL Port - - l This parameterspecifies the RPL port.

l There is only one RPLport and this RPL portmust be the east or westport on the RPL ownernode.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof Control VLAN.

l Each node on theEthernet ring transmitsthe R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS(R-APS) channel toensure consistencybetween the nodeswhen the ERPSswitching is performed.Control VLAN is usedfor isolating thededicated R-APSchannel. Therefore, theVLAN ID in ControlVLAN cannot beduplicate with theVLAN IDs that arecontained in the servicepackets or inband DCNpackets.

l The Control VLANmust be set to the samevalue for all the NEs onan ERPS ring.

Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thedestination node. Thedefault destination MACaddress in the R-APSpackets is always 01-19-A7-00-00-01.

A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)management.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetProtection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.



A-147


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the ERPSinstance.

East Port - - This parameter indicatesthe east port of the ERPSinstance.

West Port - - This parameter indicatesthe west port of the ERPSinstance.

RPL Owner Ring NodeFlag

YesNo

- This parameter indicateswhether a node on the ringis the ring protection link(RPL) owner.

RPL Port - - This parameter indicatesthe RPL port.

Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe VLAN ID ofControl VLAN.

l Each node on theEthernet ring transmitsthe R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS(R-APS) channel toensure consistencybetween the nodeswhen the ERPSswitching is performed.Control VLAN is usedfor isolating thededicated R-APSchannel. Therefore, theVLAN ID in ControlVLAN cannot beduplicate with theVLAN IDs that arecontained in the servicepackets or inband DCNpackets.

l The Control VLANmust be set to the samevalue for all the NEs onan ERPS ring.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thedestination node. Thedefault destination MACaddress in the R-APSpackets is always 01-19-A7-00-00-01.

Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe hold-off time of theERPS hold-off timer.

l The hold-off timer isused for negotiating theprotection switchingsequence when theERPS coexists withother protectionschemes so that thefault can be rectified inthe case of otherprotection switching(such as LAGprotection) before theERPS occurs. When anode on the ring detectsone or more new faults,it starts up the hold-offtimer if the preset hold-off time is set to a valuethat is not 0. During thehold-off time, the faultis not reported totrigger an ERPS. Whenthe hold-off timer timesout, the node checks thelink status regardlesswhether the fault thattriggers the startup ofthe timer exists. If thefault exists, the nodereports it to trigger anERPS. This fault can bethe same as or differentfrom the fault thattriggers the initialstartup of the hold-offtimer.



A-149


Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe guard time of theERPS guard timer.

l The nodes on the ringcontinuously forwardthe R-APS packets tothe Ethernet ring. As aresult, the outdated R-APS packets may existon the ring network.After a node on the ringreceives the outdatedR-APS packets, anincorrect ERPS mayoccur. The ERPS guardtimer is an R-APS timerused for preventing anode on the ring fromreceiving outdated R-APS packets. When afaulty node on the ringdetects that theswitching condition iscleared, the node startsup the guard timer andstarts to forward the R-APS (NR) packets.During this period, theR-APS packetsreceived by the nodeare discarded. Thereceived R-APSpackets are forwardedonly after the time ofthe guard timer expires.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


WTR Time(min) 5 to 12, in step of 1 - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe WTR time of theWRT timer in the caseof ERPS protection.

l The WTR time refers tothe duration from thetime when the workingchannel is restored tothe time when theswitching is released.When the workingchannel is restored, theWTR timer of the RPLowner starts up. Inaddition, a signal thatindicates the operationof the WTR timer iscontinuously output inthe timing process.When the WTR timertimes out and noswitching request of ahigher priority isreceived, the signalindicating theoperation of the WTRtimer is not transmitted.In addition, the WTRrelease signal iscontinuously output.

l The WTR timer is usedto prevent frequentswitching caused by theunstable workingchannel.

Packet TransmitInterval(s)

1 to 10 - This parameter displays orspecifies the interval forsending R-APS packetsperiodically.

Entity Level 0 to 7 - This parameter indicatesor specifies the level of themaintenance entity.

Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicatesthe last switching request.



A-151


RB Status - - This parameter indicatesthe RB status of thepackets received by theworking node.l noRB: The RPL is not

blocked.l RB (RPL Blocked):

The RPL is blocked.

DNF Status - - This parameter indicatesthe DNF status of thepackets received by theworking node.l noDNF: The R-APS

packets do not containthe DNF flag. In thiscase, the packets areforwarded by the nodethat detects the fault ona non-RPL link, and thenode that receives thepackets is requested toclear the forwardingaddress table.

l DNF: The R-APSpackets contain theDNF flags. In this case,the packets areforwarded by the nodethat detects the fault onan RPL link, and thenode that receives thepackets is informed notto clear the forwardingaddress table.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicatesthe status of the statemachine at the workingnode.l Idle: The Ethernet ring

is in normal state. Forexample, no node onthe Ethernet ringdetects any faults orreceive the R_APS(NR, RB) packets.

l Protection: TheEthernet ring is inprotected state. Forexample, a fault on thenode triggers theERPS, or a node on thering is in the WTRperiod after the fault isrectified.

Node Carried withCurrent Packet

- - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address carriedin the R-APS packetsreceived by the currentnode. The MAC addressrefers to the MAC addressof the source node thatinitiates the switchingrequest.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port GroupCreation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.



A-153


Protocol Type MSTPSTP

MSTP This parameter specifiesthe protocol type.l MSTP: stands for

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 910supports the CISTMSTP only.

l STP: stands forSpanning TreeProtocol.

Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the protocol ofthe port group or amember port in the portgroup.

l If the STP or MSTP isenabled, the spanningtree topology isautomatically re-configured. As a result,the services areinterrupted.

Parameters for Application PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where themember of port group islocated.

Available Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe available port list inwhich a port can be addedto the port group.

Selected Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe selected ports that canbe added to the port group.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port GroupConfiguration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for the Added PortParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where themember of port group islocated.

Available Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe available port list inwhich a port needs to beadded to the port group.

Selected Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe selected ports thatneed to be added to theport group.

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ BridgeParameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.



A-155


Port Group ID - - l This parameterindicates the ID of theport group.

l This parameter can beset to only the portgroup ID that isautomaticallyallocated.

MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

Bridge ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Group ID - - l This parameterindicates the ID of theport group.

l This parameter can beset to only the portGroup ID that isautomaticallyallocated.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameterspecifies the MSTPnetwork diameter.

l Network Diameter isrelated to the linkwhose number ofswitches is the mostand is indicated by thenumber of switches thatare connected to thelink. When you setNetwork Diameter forthe switches, the MSTPautomatically sets MaxAge(s), Hello Time(s),and Forward Delay(s)to the more appropriatevalues for the switches.

l If the value of NetworkDiameter is greater,the network is in alarger scale.

Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameterspecifies the intervalfor transmitting theCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.

l The greater the value ofthis parameter, the lessthe network resourcesthat are occupied by thespanning tree. Thetopology stability,however, decreases.



A-157


Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameterspecifies the maximumage of the CBPDUpacket that is recordedby the port.

l The greater the value,the longer thetransmission distanceof the CBPDU, whichindicates that thenetwork diameter isgreater. When the valueof this parameter isgreater, it is lesspossible that the bridgedetects the link fault ina timely manner andthus the networkadaptation ability isreduced.

Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdofftime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.

l The greater the value,the longer the delay ofthe network statechange. Hence, thetopology changes areslower and the recoveryin the case of faults isslower.

Port ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port in the port group.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Enable Edge Attribute DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies themanagement edgeattributes of the port.

l This parameterspecifies whether to setthe port as an edge port.The edge port refers tothe bridge port that isconnected to the LAN.In normal cases, thisport does not receive ortransmit BPDUmessages.

l This parameter can beset to Enabled onlywhen the port isdirectly connected tothe datacommunicationsterminal equipment,such as a computer. Inother cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe actual managementedge attributes of the port.



A-159


Point-to-Point Attribute falsetrueauto

auto l This parameterspecifies the point-to-point attribute of theport.

l false: forced non-point-to-point linkattribute

l true: forced point-to-point link attribute

l auto: automaticallydetected point-to-pointlink attribute

l If this parameter is setto auto, the bridgedetermines ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute of the portaccording to the actualworking mode. If theactual working mode isfull-duplex, the actualpoint-to-point attributeis true. If the actualworking mode is half-duplex, Actual Point-to-Point Attribute isfalse.

l Only the designatedport whose ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute is "True" cantransmit the rapid statemigration request andresponse.


Actual Point-to-PointAttribute

- - This parameter indicatesthe actual point-to-pointattribute of the port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Max Transmit PacketCount

1 to 255 3 l This parameterspecifies the maximumnumber of packets to betransmitted.

l The maximum numberof packets to betransmitted by the portrefers to the maximumnumber of MSTPpackets that the portcan transmit within 1s.

l This parameter needs tobe set according to theplanning information.

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CISTParameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.


Port Group - - This parameter specifiesthe port group.

MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicatesthe MSTI ID. The value 0indicates common andinternal spanning tree(CIST). TheOptiX RTN910 supports only theMSTP that uses CIST.



A-161


Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16bits of the bridge IDindicates the priority ofthe bridge.

l When the value issmaller, the priority ishigher. As a result, thebridge is more possibleto be selected as theroot bridge.

l If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STPnetwork use the samevalue, the bridge whoseMAC address is thesmallest is selected asthe root bridge.



Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.

l When the value issmaller, the priority ishigher.

Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameterindicates the status ofthe network that theport is connected to.

l In the case of thebridges on both ends ofthe path, set thisparameter to the samevalue.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_RunningInformation About the CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTPCIST.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.


Port Group ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the port group.

Protocol Running Mode MSTPSTP

Disabled l This parameterindicates the runningmode of the protocol.

l MSTP: stands forMultiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 910supports only theCIST-based MSTP.




A-163


Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe bridge.

l The most significant 16bits of the bridge IDindicates the priority ofthe bridge.



Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thebridge.

Root Bridge MACAddress

- - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of theroot bridge.

External Path CostERPC

- - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

Domain Root BridgePriority


Domain Root BridgeMAC Address


Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe root port.

l The most significanteight bits of the ID ofthe root port indicatethe priority of the rootport.


Root Port - - This parameter indicatesthe root port.

Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameterindicates the intervalfor transmittingCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.






A-165


Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdofftime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.


MST Domain Max HopCount


Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicatesthe identifier of thetopology change.

Last Topology ChangeTime(s)

- - This parameter indicatesthe duration of the lasttopology change.

Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicatesthe count of the topologychanges.



Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicateswhether the protocol ofthe port group or amember of the port groupis enabled.

Port Role - - This parameter indicatesthe role of a port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Port Status DiscardingLearningForwarding

Discarding This parameter indicatesthe state of a port.l Discarding: receives

only BPDU packetsl Learning: only receives

or transmits BPDUpackets

l Forwarding: forwardsuser traffic, andtransmits/receivesBPDU packets

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.


Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameterindicates the status ofthe network that theport is connected to.

l In the case of thebridges on both ends ofthe path, set thisparameter to the samevalue.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16bits of the bridge IDindicates the priority ofthe bridge.





A-167


Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thebridge.

Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.


Design Port - - This parameter indicatesthe designated port.

Edge Port Attribute DisabledEnabled

Enabled l This parameterspecifies themanagement edgeattributes of the port.

l This parameterspecifies whether to setthe port as an edge port.The edge port refers tothe bridge port that isconnected to the LAN.In normal cases, thisport does not receive ortransmit BPDUmessages.

l This parameter can beset to Enabled onlywhen the port isdirectly connected tothe datacommunicationsterminal equipment,such as a computer. Inother cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Actual Edge PortAttribute

- - This parameter indicatesthe actual managementedge attributes of the port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Point to Point falsetrueauto

auto l This parameterspecifies the point-to-point attribute of theport.

l false: forced non-point-to-point linkattribute

l true: forced point-to-point link attribute

l auto: automaticallydetected point-to-pointlink attribute

l If this parameter is setto auto, the bridgedetermines ActualPoint to PointAttribute of the portaccording to the actualworking mode. If theactual working mode isfull-duplex, the actualpoint-to-point attributeis true. If the actualworking mode is half-duplex, Actual Pointto Point Attribute isfalse.

l Only the designatedport whose ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute is "True" cantransmit the rapid statemigration request andresponse.


Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicatesthe actual point-to-pointattribute of the port.



A-169


Max Count ofTransmitting Message

1 to 255 3 l This parameterindicates the maximumnumber of packets to betransmitted.

l The maximum numberof packets to betransmitted by the portrefers to the maximumnumber of MSTPpackets that the portcan transmit within 1s.

Protocol Running Mode STPMSTP

- l This parameterindicates the runningmode of the protocol.

l MSTP: stands forMultiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 910supports only theCIST-based MSTP.


Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameterindicates the intervalfor transmitting theCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdingtime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.


Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 910 doesnot support thisparameter.

A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Protocol Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.



A-171

2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.


Service ID - - This parameter indicatesthe service ID.

Enabled Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the IGMPSnooping protocol.

l If the bridge accesses aLAN where the IGMPmulticast server exists,you can enable theIGMP Snoopingprotocol according tothe requirement.

Router Port Aging Time(min)

1 to 120 8 l If an entry is notupdated in a certainperiod (that is, noIGMP query packet isreceived), this entry isautomatically deleted.This mechanism iscalled aging, and thisperiod is called agingtime.

l If this parameter is setto a very large value,the bridge storesexcessive multicastentries that areoutdated.Consequently, theresources of themulticast table areexhausted.

l If this parameter is setto a very small value,the bridge may deletethe multicast entry thatis required.Consequently, theforwarding efficiencydecreases.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Maximum Times of NoResponse from MulticastMembers

1 to 4 3 l This parameterspecifies the maximumnumber of multicastgroup members who donot respond.

l If the IEEE 802.1qbridge transmits anIGMP group querypacket to the multicastmember ports, theIEEE 802.1q bridgestarts the timer for thequery of the maximumnumber of responses. Ifno IGMP reportpackets are receivedwithin the query time,the IEEE 802.1q bridgeadds one to the numberof no responses at theport. When the numberof no responsesexceeds the presetvalue of MaximumTimes of No Responsefrom MulticastMembers, the IEEE802.1q bridge deletesthe additional multicastmembers from themulticast group.

Maximum Number ofMulticast Groups

- - l This parameterspecifies the maximumnumber of allowablemulticast groups.

l The multicast grouprecords the mappingrelations between theports on the router,MAC multicastaddresses, and memberports in the multicastgroup.



A-173


Maximum Number ofMulticast GroupMembers

- - l This parameterspecifies the maximumnumber of allowablemulticast groupmembers.

l A multicast groupmember refers to thehost that is added to amulticast group.

Actual Multicast Count - - This parameter indicatesthe number of actuallyused multicast groups.

Actual MulticastMembers Count

- - This parameter indicatesthe number of actuallyused multicast groupmembers.

A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.

3. Click Add.

Parameters for Fast Leave Ports



VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameterspecifies the VLANwhere the port to bequickly deleted islocated.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Port Type V-UNIV-NNI

V-UNI l This parameterspecifies the type of theport to be quicklydeleted.


Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port to be quicklydeleted.

A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol routemanagement.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Router Port Management tab.

Parameters for Router Port Management


Service ID - - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the created E-LAN service.

VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicatesthe VLAN ID of the routerport.

Port Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the router port.

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe router port.

Port Status - - This parameter indicatesthe status of the routerport.

Port Creating Time - - This parameter indicatesthe time when the routerport is created.



A-175


Port Remainder AgingTime(min)

- - This parameter indicatesthe remaining aging timeof the router port.

A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguraiton_Static Router Port Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Router Port Management tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for Router Port CreationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicatesthe VLAN ID of the routerport.

Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available ports.

Selected Port - - This parameter indicatesthe specified router port.

A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Route Member Port Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of theIGMP Snooping protocol.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Multicast Groups InformationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicatesthe VLAN ID of themulticast group.

Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe multicast MACaddress.

Multicast Groups Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the multicastgroup.

Multicast GroupCreating Time

- - This parameter indicatesthe time when themulticast group is set up.

Parameters for Multicast Group Members InformationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicatesthe VLAN ID of themulticast group member.

Port Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the multicastgroup member.

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe multicast groupmember port.

Port Remainder AgingTimes

- - This parameter indicatesthe remaining non-response times of themulticast group memberport.



A-177

A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for Router Port CreationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID of themulticast group.

Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter specifiesthe multicast MACaddress.

Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available interfaces.

Selected Port - - This parameter indicatesthe preset port of themulticast group members.

A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP SnoopingConfiguration_Data Statistics

This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMPSnooping protocol.


Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management



VLAN ID - - This parameter indicatesthe VLAN ID of theservice.

Port Type - - This parameter indicatesthe port type.

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port.

Packet Statistics Status ClearStartStop

Clear This parameter indicatesor specifies the status ofcollecting the packetstatistics.

IGMPv1 Query PacketCount

- - This parameter indicatesthe number of receivedIGMPv1 query packets.





IGMP Leaving PacketCount

- - This parameter displaysthe number of leavingpackets that are received.

IGMPv1 MemberReport Packet Count

- - This parameter indicatesthe number of receivedpackets that are reportedby the IGMPv1 members.





Unrecognized orUnprocessed PacketCount

- - This parameter indicatesthe number of packets thatcannot be recognized orprocessed.



A-179


Discarded IncorrectPacket Count

- - This parameter indicatesthe number of discardederror packets.

A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link AggregationManagement_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface

Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.3. Click New.


LAG No. 1 to 16 1 l This parameterspecifies the LAGnumber to be setmanually.

l This parameter is validonly whenAutomatically Assignis not selected.

Automatically Assign SelectedDeselected

Selected l This parameterindicates whether LAGNo. is allocatedautomatically.

l When AutomaticallyAssign is selected,LAG No. cannot be set.

LAG Name - - This parameter specifiesthe LAG name.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


LAG Type StaticManual

Static l Static: You can create aLAG. When you add ordelete a member port toor from the LAG, theLink AggregationControl Protocol(LACP) protocol isrequired. In a LAG, aport can be in theSelected or Standbystate. The aggregationinformation isexchanged amongdifferent equipmentthrough the LACPprotocol to ensure thatthe aggregationinformation is the sameamong all the nodes.

l Manual: You canmanually create a LAG.When you add or deletea member port, theLACP protocol is notrequired. The port canbe in the up or downstate. According to thephysical up or downstate, the portdetermines whether toperform anaggregation.



A-181


Revertive Mode RevertiveNon-Revertive

Non-Revertive l This parameter can beset only when LoadSharing is set to Non-Sharing.

l When a LAG is set toRevertive, the servicesare switched back to theformer workingchannel after thischannel is restored tonormal.

l When a LAG is set toNon-Revertive, thestatus of the LAG doesnot change after theformer workingchannel is restored tonormal. That is, theservices are stilltransmitted on theprotection channel.

Load Sharing SharingNon-Sharing

Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each memberlink of a LAGprocesses traffic at thesame time and sharesthe traffic load. Thesharing mode canincrease a bandwidthutilization for the link.When the LAGmembers change, orcertain links fail, thesystem automaticallyre-allocates the traffic.

l Non-Sharing: Only onemember link of a LAGcarries traffic, and theother link is in thestandby state. In thiscase, a hot backupmechanism isprovided. When theactive link of a LAG isfaulty, the systemactivates the standbylink, thus preventinglink failure.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Load Sharing HashAlgorithm

Source MACDestination MACSource and DestinationMACSource IPDestination IPSource and Destination IP

Source MAC l This parameter is validonly when LoadSharing of a LAG is setto Sharing.

l The load sharingcomputation methodsinclude: MAC addressspecific allocation(based on the sourceMAC address,destination MACaddress, and XORbetween source MACaddress and sourceMAC address), IPaddress specificallocation (based on thesource IP address,destination IP address,and XOR betweensource IP address andsource IP address).



A-183


System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameterindicates the priority ofa LAG. The smaller thevalue of SystemPriority, the higher thepriority.

l When a local LAGnegotiates with anopposite LAG throughLACP packets, bothLAGs can obtain thesystem priorities ofeach other. Then, theLAG of the highersystem priority isconsidered as thecomparison result ofboth LAGs so that theaggregationinformation isconsistent at bothLAGs. If the prioritiesof both LAGs are thesame, the system MACaddresses arecompared. Then, thecomparison resultbased on the LAG withsmaller system MACaddress is considered asthe result of both LAGsand is used to ensurethat the aggregationinformation isconsistent at bothLAGs.

Port Settings ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Main Board - - l This parameterspecifies the mainboard in a LAG.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Main Port - - l This parameterspecifies the main portin a LAG.

l After a LAG is created,you can add Ethernetservices to the mainport only. Servicescannot be added to aslave port. When LoadSharing is set to Non-Sharing, the linkconnected to the mainport is used to transmitthe services, and thelink connected to theslave port is used forprotection.

Board (Available SlavePorts)

- - l This parameterspecifies the slaveboard in a LAG.


Port (Available SlavePorts)

- - l This parameterspecifies the salve portin a LAG.

l The slave ports in aLAG are fixed. Unlessthey are manuallymodified, the systemdoes not automaticallyadd them to or deletethem from the LAG.

Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicatesthe selected slave ports.

A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_PortPriority

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.


Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.



A-185

2. Click the Port Priority tab.


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port whose priority canbe set.

Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameterindicates the prioritiesof the ports in a LAG asdefined in the LACPprotocol. The smallerthe value, the higher thepriority.

l When ports are addedinto a LAG, the port ofthe highest priority ispreferred for servicetransmission.

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click New.

Parameters for Convergence PointsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - This parameter specifies the board at theconvergence point.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port on theboard of the convergence point.NOTE

One port can be in an LPT only.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Access Points


Board - - This parameter specifies the board at theaccess point.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port on theboard of the access point.NOTE

The access point supports selection of multipleports on different boards.

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port

Mirroring from the Function Tree.

2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.



Mirror Name - - l This parameter specifies the name of themirroring task.

l After the mirroring function of the port isenabled, you can monitor all the mirroredports by analyzing the packets at themirroring port only. As a result, you caneasily manage the ports.


Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction inwhich the service to be monitored.

l Ingress indicates that the Listened Portcopies the received packets to the MirrorListener Port and sends the packets outof the Mirror Listener Port.

l Egress indicates that the Listened Portcopies the transmitted packets to theMirror Listener Port and sends thepackets out of the Mirror ListenerPort.

Mirror ListenerPort

- - l This parameter specifies the mirroringlistener port and the listened port.



A-187


Listened Port - - l Listened Port indicates the source portof the mirrored packets.

l Mirror Listener Port indicates the portfrom which the packets copied from theListened Port are sent out.

l Mirror Listener Port: The port whereservices are available cannot be selected.Otherwise, the creation fails.

A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAMThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance DomainCreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance AssociationCreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association endpoint (MEP).

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance associationintermediate point (MIP).

A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB EnablingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT EnablingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM ParameterThis topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame MonitoringThis topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at theEthernet port.

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Domain Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.




- - l This parameter specifies the name of themaintenance domain.

l The maintenance domain refers to thenetwork for the Ethernet OAM.


MaintenanceDomain Level

01234567

4 l This parameter specifies the level of themaintenance domain.

l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.

l When the value is set to 0, themaintenance domain is at the lowestlevel. The values 1-7 indicate that thelevel increases in a sequential order.

l The OAM packets whose level is higherthan the preset value are transparentlytransmitted by the MEPs. The OAMpackets whose level is lower than thepreset value are directly discarded by theMEPs. The OAM packets whose level isthe same as the preset value are respondedto or terminated by the MEPs accordingto the message type.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Association Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.



A-189

3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.Choose New > New Maintenance Association.



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created maintenanceassociation.


- - l This parameter specifies the name of themaintenance association, which is adomain related to a service. Throughmaintenance association division, theconnectivity check (CC) can beperformed on the network that transmitsa service instance.


Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the serviceinstance that is related to the maintenanceassociation.

CC Test TransmitPeriod

1s10s1 min10 min

1s l This parameter specifies the interval fortransmitting packets in the CC.

l The CC is performed to check theavailability of the service.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association endpoint (MEP).


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >

New MEP Point.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created MEP.



Board - - This parameter specifies the board wherethe MEP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where theMEP is located.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID ofthe current service.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured withan MEP ID, which is unique in themaintenance association. The MEP ID isrequired in the OAM operation.


Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction ofthe MEP.

l Ingress indicates the direction in whichthe packets are transmitted to the port,and Egress indicates the direction inwhich the packets are transmitted fromthe port.

CC Status ActiveInactive

Active l This parameter specifies whether toenable the CC function of the MEP.

l In the case of the tests based on the MPIDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Remote MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point

dialog box is displayed.4. Click New.



A-191



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the MEP.



RemoteMaintenance PointID(_e.g:1,3-6)

1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of theremote MEP.

l If other MEPs may initiate OAMoperations to an MEP in the same MA,set the other MEPs to be the remoteMEPs.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance associationintermediate point (MIP).


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the MIP Point tab.3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the MIP.

Board - - This parameter specifies the board wherethe MIP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where theMIP is located.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with anMIP ID, which is unique in themaintenance domain. The MIP ID isrequired in the OAM operation.NOTE

To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at aport, ensure that only one MIP can be createdand the level of the MIP must be higher thanthe level of the MEP.

A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.4. Choose OAM > Start LB.


MP ID SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if theLB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.

Sink MaintenancePoint MACAddress

SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if theLB test is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance domain for the LB test.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance association for the LB test.

SourceMaintenance PointID

- - l This parameter specifies the sourcemaintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the sourcemaintenance point.



A-193


DestinationMaintenance PointID

- - l This parameter specifies the destinationmaintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP can be set to thedestination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point ID canbe set only when MP ID is selected.

DestinationMaintenance PointMAC Address

- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MACaddress of the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LBtest.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP canbe set to the MAC address of thedestination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point MACAddress can be set only when SinkMaintenance Point MAC Address.

TransmittedPacket Count

1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number ofpackets transmitted each time in the LBtest.

l When the value is greater, the requiredduration is longer.

TransmittedPacket Length

64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of atransmitted LBM packet.

l If the packet length is different, the testresult may be different. In normal cases,it is recommended that you use thedefault value.

TransmittedPacket Priority

0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority oftransmitting packets.

l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7indicates the highest priority. In normalcases, this parameter is set to the highestpriority.

Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevantinformation and result of the LB test.

A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.4. Choose OAM > Start LT.

Test Node ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

MP ID SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LTtest is performed on the basis of MP IDs.

Sink MaintenancePoint MACAddress

SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LTtest is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance domain for the LT test.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance association for the LT test.


- - l This parameter specifies the sourcemaintenance point in the LT test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the sourcemaintenance point.

DestinationMaintenance PointID

- - l This parameter specifies the destinationmaintenance point in the LT test.

l Only the MEP can be set to thedestination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point ID canbe set only when MP ID is selected.

DestinationMaintenance PointMAC Address

- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MACaddress of the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LTtest.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP canbe set to the MAC address of thedestination maintenance point.

l Destination Maintenance Point MACAddress can be set only when SinkMaintenance Point MAC Address.



A-195

Parameters for the Detection Result



- - This parameter indicates the sourcemaintenance point in the LT test.

DestinationMaintenance PointID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC addressof the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LT test.

ResponseMaintenance PointID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC addressof the port where the respondingmaintenance point is located in the LT test.

Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number ofhops from the source maintenance pointto the responding maintenance point or tothe destination maintenance point in theLT test.

l The number of hops indicates theadjacent relation between the respondingmaintenance point to the sourcemaintenance point. The number of hopsincreases by one when a responding pointoccurs on the link from the sourcemaintenance point to the destinationmaintenance point.

Test Result --

- This parameter indicates the result of the LTtest.

A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.



Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingport.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Enable OAMProtocol

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the OAM protocol.

l After the OAM protocol is enabled, thecurrent Ethernet port starts to use thepreset mode to create the OAMconnection with the opposite end.

OAM WorkingMode

ActivePassive

Active l This parameter indicates or specifies theworking mode of the OAM.

l The port whose OAM working mode isset to Active can initiate the OAMconnection.

l The port whose OAM working mode isset to Passive can only wait for theopposite end to send the OAMconnection request.

l The OAM working mode of theequipment at only one end can bePassive.

Link EventNotification

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the local link events can benotified to the opposite end.

l If the alarms caused by link events can bereported, that is, if the number ofperformance events (for example, errorframe period, error frame, error framesecond, and error frame signal cycle) atthe local end exceeds the presetthreshold, these performance events arenotified to the port at the opposite endthrough the link event notificationfunction.




A-197


Remote SideLoopbackResponse

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the port responds to the remoteloopback.

l Remote loopback indicates that the localOAM entity transmits packets to theremote OAM entity for loopback. Thelocal OAM entity can locate the fault andtest the link performance throughloopback data analysis.

l If a port does not support remoteloopback response, this port does notrespond to the loopback request from theremote port regardless of the OAM portstatus.

Loopback Status Non-LoopbackInitiate Loopback atLocalRespond Loopbackof Remote

- This parameter indicates the loopback statusat the local end.NOTE

Loopback Status is valid only after you chooseOAM > Enable Remote Loopback.

OAM DiscoveryStatus

FAULTACTIVE_SEND_LOCALPASSIVE_WAITSEND_LOCAL_REMOTESEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_OKSEND_ANY

- This parameter indicates the OAMdiscovery status at the local end.

Port TransmitStatus

FWDDISCARD

- l This parameter indicates the status oftransmitting packets at the local end.

l When a port is in the FWD state, the portforwards the non-OAM packets. When aport is in the DISCARD state, the portdiscards the non-OAM packets.

Port Receive Status FWDDISCARDLB

- l This parameter indicates the status ofreceiving packets at the local end.

l In the FWD state, the port forwards thenon-OAM packets. In the LB state, theport loopback the non-OAM packets. Inthe DISCARD state, the port discards thenon-OAM packets.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Error Frame Monitoring

This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at theEthernet port.


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.



Error FrameMonitor Window(ms)

1000 to 60000, instep of 100

1000 This parameter specifies the duration ofmonitoring error frames.

Error FrameMonitor Threshold(frame)

1 to 4294967295, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring error frames.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Monitor Window(ms), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of Error FrameMonitor Threshold(frame), an alarm isreported.

Error FramePeriod Window(frame)

1488 to 892800000,in step of 1

892800000 This parameter specifies the window ofmonitoring the error frame period.

Error FramePeriod Threshold(frame)

1 to 892800000, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring the error frame period.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Period Window(frame), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of Error FramePeriod Threshold(frame), an alarm isreported.

Error FrameSecond Window(s)

10 to 900, in step of1

60 This parameter specifies the time window ofmonitoring the error frame second.



A-199


Error FrameSecond Threshold(s)

10 to 900, in step of1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring error frame seconds.

l If any error frame occurs in one second,this second is called an errored framesecond. Within the specified value ofError Frame Second Window(s), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of Error FrameSecond Threshold(s), an alarm isreported.

Error FrameSignal PeriodicMonitor Window(Entries)

1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window ofmonitoring the error frame signal period.

Error FrameSignal PeriodicMonitor Threshold(Entries)

1 to 7500000000, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring the error frame signal period.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Signal Periodic MonitorWindow(Entries), if the number of errorsignals exceeds the preset value of ErrorFrame Signal Periodic MonitorThreshold(Entries), an alarm isreported.

A.11 QoS ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_CreateThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_ModificationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain appliedports.

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port PolicyThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification ConfigurationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.

A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.



Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicatesthe ID of the mappingrelation between DiffServdomains.

Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicatesthe name of the mappingrelation between DiffServdomains.

NOTE

If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, andMapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe C-VLAN of theingress packets.

l C-VLAN indicates theclient-side VLAN, andthe value 7 indicates thehighest priority.

SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe S-VLAN of theingress packets.

l S-VLAN indicates theserver-side VLAN, andthe value 7 indicates thehighest priority.



A-201


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterindicates the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of the ingresspackets.

l The differentiatedservices code point(DSCP) refers to bits0-5 of the differentiatedservices (DS) field inthe packet and indicatesthe service class anddiscarding priority ofthe packet.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PHB BEAF1AF2AF3AF4EFCS6CS7

- l This parameterindicates the per-hopbehavior (PHB) serviceclass of the DiffServdomain.

l The PHB service classrefers to the forwardingbehavior of theDiffServ node on thebehavior aggregate(BA) operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, and DSCPvalue) contained in thepackets of the DiffServdomain and the eightPDB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.

NOTEThe AF1 is classified intothree sub service classes,namely, AF11, AF12, andAF13, only one of which isvalid. It is the same casewith the AF2, AF3, andAF4.



A-203

Parameters for Egress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of theDiffServ domain.

l The PHB service classrefers to the forwardingbehavior of theDiffServ node on thebehavior aggregate(BA) operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, and DSCPvalue) contained in thepackets of the DiffServdomain and the eightPDB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe C-VLAN of theegress packets.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priority ofthe S-VLAN of theegress packets.


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterindicates the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of the ingresspackets.

l The DSCP refers to bits0-5 of the DS field inthe packet and indicatesthe service class anddiscarding priority ofthe packet.


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port that uses theDiffServ domain.

Packet Type CVLANSVLANIP-DSCP

CVLAN The packets trusted by theOptiX RTN 910 are theC_VLAN, S_VLAN andIP DSCP packets thatcontain the C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, or DSCP value.By default, the untrustedpackets are mapped to theBE service class for best-effort forwarding.NOTE

The E-Line point-to-pointtransparent transmissionservice supports only themapping from DSCPpackets to the PHB serviceclass.



A-205

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ DomainManagement_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.



Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 2 This parameter specifiesthe ID of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.

Packet Type cvlansvlanip-dscp

cvlan l This parameterspecifies the type of thepacket.

l The packets trusted bythe OptiX RTN 910 arethe C_VLAN,S_VLAN and IP DSCPpackets that contain theC_VLAN priority,S_VLAN priority, orDSCP value. Bydefault, the untrustedpackets are mapped tothe BE service class forbest-effort forwarding.

NOTEThe E-Line point-to-pointtransparent transmissionservice supports only themapping from DSCPpackets to the PHB serviceclass.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, MappingRelation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. Thedefault DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Ingress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the C-VLANpriority of the ingresspackets.


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANpriority of the ingresspackets.


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterspecifies the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of the ingresspackets.




A-207



- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of the DSdomain.

l The PHB service classrefers to the forwardingbehavior of the DSnode on the behavioraggregate (BA)operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, and DSCPvalue) contained in thepackets of the DSdomain and the eightPDB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Egress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of the DSdomain.

l The PHB service classrefers to the forwardingbehavior of the DSnode on the behavioraggregate (BA)operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, and DSCPvalue) contained in thepackets of the DSdomain and the eightPDB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the C-VLANpriority of the egresspackets.




A-209


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANpriority of the egresspackets.


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterspecifies the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of the egresspackets.



Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board that uses themapping relationsbetween DS domains.

Available Port - - This parameter displaysthe available port list fromwhich you can select theport that uses the mappingrelations between DSdomains.

Selected Port - - This parameter displaysthe selected port list. Theports in the list use themapping relationsbetween DS domains.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain AppliedPort_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain appliedports.


Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.3. Click the Apply Port tab.4. Click Modify.

Parameters for Configuring the Applied PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.



A-211


Packet Type CVLANSVLANIP-DSCP

CVLAN l This parameterspecifies the type of thepacket.

l The packets trusted bythe OptiX RTN 910 arethe C-VLAN, S-VLANand IP-DSCP packetsthat contain the C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN priority, orDSCP value. Bydefault, the untrustedpackets are mapped tothe BE service class forbest-effort forwarding.

l When the OptiX RTN910 receives servicesand identifies servicetypes based on VLANpriorities, the trustedpackets at a UNI portscarry C-VLANpriorities, and thetrusted packets at anNNI port carry S-VLAN priorities.When the OptiX RTN910 receives servicesand identifies servicetypes based on DSCPvalues, the trustedpackets at a port carryIP-DSCP values.

NOTEThe E-Line point-to-pointtransparent transmissionservice supports only themapping from DSCPpackets to the PHB serviceclass.

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where the port islocated.

Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Selected Port - - This parameter indicatesthe selected port.The selected port isapplied to the DS domain.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping RelationName is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port appliedto the default DS domain cannot be modified.

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Policy Management from the Function Tree.


Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameterindicates the policy IDof the port.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports a maximumnumber of 36 policies.

Policy Name - - This parameter indicatesor specifies the policyname of the port.



A-213


CoS CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l The BE, AF1, AF2,AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,and CS7 service classesrespectively map eightqueuing entities. TheOptiX RTN 910provides different QoSpolicies for the queuesat different serviceclasses.

l CS6-CS7: indicates thehighest service grade,which is mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.

l EF: indicates fastforwarding. Thisservice class isapplicable to the trafficwhose delay is smalland packet loss ratio islow, for example, voiceand video services.

l AF1-AF4: indicatesassured forwarding.This service class isapplicable to the trafficthat requires rateguarantee but does notrequire delay or jitterlimit.

l BE: indicates that thetraffic is forwarded inbest-effort mannerwithout specialprocessing.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Grooming Police AfterReloading

SPWRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SPAF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:WRR

l The strict priority (SP)scheduling algorithm isdesigned for the keyservices. Oneimportantcharacteristic of the keyservices is that higherpriorities are requiredto minimize theresponse delay in thecase of congestionevents.

l The weighted roundrobin (WRR)scheduling algorithmdivides each port intomultiple output sub-queues. The pollingscheduling isperformed among theoutput sub-queues toensure that each sub-queue has a certainperiod of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports the setting ofthe SP+WRRscheduling algorithmof the CoS queueaccording to therequirement, andprovides one or morequeues that complywith the SP algorithm.Except for the defaultvalue, however, thevalue of the WRRscheduling algorithmand the value of the SPscheduling algorithmcannot be interleaved.That is, except for thedefault value,Grooming PoliceAfter Reloading canbe changed from SP toWRR according to thequeue priorities in adescending order(CS7-BE).



A-215



Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameterspecifies the weight ofthe policy in the WRRqueue. The weightindicates thepercentage of thebandwidth resourcesobtained by the WRRqueue.

l This parameter can beset only whenGrooming PoliceAfter Reloading is setto WRR.


Bandwidth Limit DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether traffic shapingis enabled for an egressqueue corresponding toa PHB service class.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR(kbit/s), CBS (byte),and PBS (byte) can beset only whenBandwidth Limit isset to Enabled.


CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, it isdirectly forwarded; ifthe rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwarded ata rate equal to the PIR.

l When the buffer queueis not empty, thepackets whose ratepasses the restriction ofthe PIR directly enterthe buffer queue andthen are forwarded at arate equal to the PIR.


CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended thatyou set the value of theCBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actualtraffic shapingprocessing, only thePBS is valid.


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIR ina certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by the PBS.




A-217

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port PolicyThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.


Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.


Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameterspecifies the policy IDof the port.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports a maximumnumber of 36 policies.

Automatically Assign SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifieswhether to automaticallyallocate the policy ID ofthe port policy. After thisparameter is selected, thesystem automaticallyallocates the policy ID,and then the policy IDcannot be set manually.

Policy Name - - This parameter specifiesthe policy name of theport.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


CoS CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l The BE, AF1, AF2,AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,and CS7 service classesrespectively map eightqueuing entities. TheOptiX RTN 910provides different QoSpolicies for the queuesat different serviceclass.

l CS6-CS7: indicates thehighest service grade,which is mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.

l EF: indicates fastforwarding. Thisservice class isapplicable to the trafficwhose delay is smalland packet loss ratio islow, for example, voiceand video services.

l AF1-AF4: indicatesassured forwarding.This service class isapplicable to the trafficthat requires rateguarantee but does notrequire delay or jitterlimit.

l BE: indicates that thetraffic is forwarded inbest-effort mannerwithout specialprocessing.



A-219


Grooming Police AfterReloading

SPWRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SPAF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:WRR

l The strict priority (SP)scheduling algorithm isdesigned for the keyservices. Oneimportantcharacteristic of the keyservices is that higherpriorities are requiredto minimize theresponse delay in thecase of congestionevents.

l The weighted roundrobin (WRR)scheduling algorithmdivides each port intomultiple output sub-queues. The pollingscheduling isperformed among theoutput sub-queues toensure that each sub-queue has a certainperiod of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports the setting ofthe SP+WRRscheduling algorithmof the CoS queueaccording to therequirement, andprovides one or morequeues that complywith the SP algorithm.Except for the defaultvalue, however, thevalue of the WRRscheduling algorithmand the value of the SPscheduling algorithmcannot be interleaved.That is, except for thedefault value,Grooming PoliceAfter Reloading canbe changed from SP toWRR according to thequeue priorities in adescending order(CS7-BE).




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameterspecifies the weight ofthe policy in the WRRqueue. The weightindicates thepercentage of thebandwidth resourcesobtained by the WRRqueue.

l This parameter can beset only whenGrooming PoliceAfter Reloading is setto WRR.



Disabled l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether traffic shapingis enabled for an egressqueue corresponding toa PHB service class.



CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.



A-221


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, it isdirectly forwarded; ifthe rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwarded ata rate equal to the PIR.



CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended thatyou set the value of theCBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actualtraffic shapingprocessing, only thePBS is valid.


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIR ina certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by the PBS.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic ClassificationConfiguration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.


Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.


Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the trafficclassification.

ACL Action PermitDeny

Permit l The access control list(ACL) determineswhether to forward ordiscard the packets thatenter the port accordingto the specifiedmatching rules.

l When this parameter isset to Permit, the ACLon the ingress sidefilters the packets thatenter the port. Only thepackets that match thespecified rules can bereceived by the port.

l When this parameter isset to Deny, ACLprocessing is notperformed for thepackets over the ingressport.



A-223

Ingress ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Logical RelationBetween Matched Rules

And And l This parameterspecifies the logicalrelationship betweenthe traffic classificationmatching rules.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports the setting ofthe logical ANDbetween multiplematching rules.

Match Type DSCP ValueCVlan IDCVlan prioritySVlan IDSVlan priority

- l After you click Add orDelete, complex trafficclassification can beperformed on the trafficthat enters the ingressport according to thepreset matching rules.

l In the case a specificservice, complex trafficclassification can bedivided into basictraffic types accordingto the DSCP value,C_VLAN ID,C_VLAN priority,S_VLAN ID, orS_VLAN priority.Traffic type is based onthe associated Ethernetpackets. Therefore, thisparameter is setaccording to the packettype and the planninginformation.

Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63CVlan ID: 1 to 4094CVlan priority: 0 to 7SVlan ID: 1 to 4094SVlan priority: 0 to 7

- l If the matching value ofthe packets is the sameas the preset MatchValue, the packetsmatch the rules ofcomplex trafficclassification.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


CoS -CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l This parameterspecifies the PHBservice class queuemapped by the trafficclassification packets.

l If this parameter is setto empty (-), the trafficclassification packetsmap the PHB serviceclass queue accordingthe mapping relationspecified in the topicabout Diffserv domainmanagement.



Enabled l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether the CARoperation is performedfor the flow in theingress direction.





A-225


CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of thepackets is not morethan the CIR, thepackets are markedblue and pass the CARpolicing. These packetsare first forwarded inthe case of networkcongestion.

l When the rate of thepackets is more than theCIR but not more thanthe PIR, the packetswhose rate is more thanthe CIR can pass therestriction of the CARand are marked yellow.The processing methodof the packets markedyellow can be set to"Pass" or "Remark"."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port. If anetwork congestionevent occurs again, thepackets marked yellowcan be processedaccording to the newpriority.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of thepackets is more than thePIR, the packets thatexceed the raterestriction are markedred and directlydiscarded.

l When the rate of thepackets is more than theCIR but not more thanthe PIR, the packetswhose rate is more thanthe CIR can pass therestriction of the CARand are marked yellow.The processing methodof the packets markedyellow can be set to"Pass" or "Remark"."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port. If anetwork congestionevent occurs again, thepackets marked yellowcan be processedaccording to the newpriority.




A-227


CBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,if the rate of the packetswhose processingmethod is marked"Pass" is not more thanthe CIR, certain burstpackets are allowed andcan be first forwardedin the case of networkcongestion. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by theCBS.


PBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,if the rate of the packetswhose processingmethod is marked"Pass" is more than theCIR but not more thanthe PIR, certain burstpackets are allowed andmarked yellow. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by the PBS.


Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameterspecifies the CARoperation performed bythe equipment on thepackets. The packetsare dyed according tothe result of the CARoperation. The dyingrule is determined bythe comparisonbetween the rate of thepackets and the presetCAR value.

l The OptiX RTN 910supports ColorBlindness only.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Packet Color RedYellowGreen

- Packets can be dyed inthree colors: red, yellow,and green. The packets inred are first discarded.

Handling Mode DiscardPassRemark

- l This parameterspecifies the method ofhandling the packets.

l Discard: The packetsare discarded.

l Pass: The packets areforwarded.

l Remark: The packetsare remarked."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port.

Relabeled CoS CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- If the handling method isset to "Remark", you canreset the CoS of thepackets.



A-229

Egress ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Bandwidth Limit DisabledEnable

Enable l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether the trafficshaping is performed inthe egress function.



CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that nopackets exist in theegress queue: When therate of the packets is notmore than the CIR,these packets directlyenter the egress queue.

l In the case that certainpackets exist in theegress queue: Thepackets whose ratepasses the restriction ofthe PIR directly enterthe egress queue, whichforwards the packets tothe next port at the CIR.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that nopackets exist in theegress queue: If the rateof the packets is morethan the CIR but is notmore than the PIR, thepackets whose rate ismore than the CIR enterthe egress queue, whichforwards the packets tothe next port at the CIR.If the rate of the packetsis more than the PIR,the packets are directlydiscarded.

l In the case that certainpackets exist in theegress queue: Thepackets whose ratepasses the restriction ofthe PIR directly enterthe egress queue, whichforwards the packets tothe next port at the CIR.


CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packetsis not more than theCIR during a certainperiod, the burstpackets are directlytransmitted. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by theCBS.




A-231


PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packetsis more than the CIRbut is not more than thePIR during a certainperiod, the burstpackets enter the egressqueue. The maximumtraffic of the burstpackets is determinedby the PBS.


A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.


Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.2. Click New.

Parameters for Port Shaping Management


Slot No. - - This parameter specifiesthe slot ID.

Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port.

CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.If the traffic shapingfunction is enabled, OptiXRTN 910 processes thepackets in the bufferqueue through the

CBS (byte) - -

PIR (kbit/s) - -




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PBS (byte) - - following methods whenno packets are available inthe queue.l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, it isdirectly forwarded; ifthe rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwarded ata rate equal to the PIR.

l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIR ina certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by the PBS.


A.12 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group



A-233

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_StatisticsGroup

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

Navigation Path1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.2. Click the Statistics Group tab.


Object - - This parameter specifies the object to bemonitored.

Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of themonitoring period.

DisplayAccumulatedValue

SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is not selected, thedisplayed value is an incrementcompared to the value that is collected inlast sampling period and stored in theregister.

l If this parameter is selected, the displayedvalue is an absolute value that is currentlystored in the register.

Display Mode GraphicsList

List l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, thenumber of performance events to bemonitored at each time cannot be morethan 10, and the unit should be the same.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Legend ColorDescription

- l This parameter indicates the descriptionof different colors.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to Graphics.

Event - - l This parameter indicates the queriedperformance events.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.

A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.


Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

2. Click the History Group tab.

Parameters


Object - - The parameter indicates the object to bemonitored.

Ended - - This parameter specifies the start time andend time of the monitoring period.

History TableType

30-Second30-MinuteCustom Period 1Custom Period 2

30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoringperiod.

Display Mode GraphicsList

List l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, thenumber of performance events to bemonitored at each time cannot be morethan 10, and the unit should be the same.

Legend ColorDescription

- l This parameter indicates the descriptionof different colors.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to Graphics.



A-235


Event - - l This parameter indicates the queriedperformance events.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.

Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performanceitems to be monitored.

Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical valueof the monitored performance items.

Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point ofeach performance event.

A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_HistoryControl Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON HistoryControl Group.


30-Second EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Secondmonitoring function.

30-Minute EnabledDisabled

Enabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.

Custom Period 1 EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 1.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 2.

History RegisterCount(1-50)

1 to 50 166(Custom Period 2)

This parameter indicates or specifies thequantity of the history registers.

Period Length(300to 43200 seconds, amultiple of 30)

300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies themonitoring period in Custom Period 1.

l The value must be an integer multiple of30.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Period Length(300to 86400 seconds, amultiple of 30)

300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies themonitoring period in Custom Period 2.

l The value must be an integer multiple of30.

A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

Navigation Pathl Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.l Click the RMON Setting tab.

Object ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to becollected.


- This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Secondmonitoring function.NOTE

In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.


Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,Not Supported is displayed for thisparameter.


- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoringfunction based on Custom Period 1.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if Custom Period 1 is set toDisabled, Not Supported is displayedfor this parameter.



A-237



- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoringfunction based on Custom Period 2.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if Custom Period 2 is set toDisabled, Not Supported is displayedfor this parameter.

Event ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Event - - This parameter indicates the performanceevent to be monitored.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on 30-Second.


- This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on Custom Period 1Custom Period1 Monitor.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on Custom Period 2Custom Period2 Monitor.

Threshold Detect Report AllDo Not DetectReport Only theUpper ThresholdReport Only theLower Threshold

Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies thethreshold detection method.

l If the number of detected events reachesthe preset threshold, the events arereported to the NMS. Otherwise, theevents are not reported to the NMS.

l If an event does not support thisparameter, Not Supported is displayed.

Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies theupper threshold. If the number ofperformance events exceeds the presetupper threshold, the correspondingperformance events are reported.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies thelower threshold. If the number ofperformance events is less than the presetlower threshold, the correspondingperformance events are reported.

Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of eachthreshold of the performance events.

A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.

A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.

A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >

Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the General tab.



A-239


Call Waiting Time(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting timeafter the local station dials the number. Ifthe calling station does not receive theresponse message from the called stationwithin the call waiting time, itautomatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to five seconds. If morethan 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to nine seconds.

l The call waiting time should be set to thesame for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode PulseDual-ToneFrequency

Dual-ToneFrequency

This parameter indicates the dialling modeof the orderwire phone.

Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephonenumber of the network-wide orderwireconference call.

l When a OptiX RTN 910 dials thetelephone number 888, the orderwirephones of all the NEs on the orderwiresubnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910receives the call, the orderwire phones onthe other NEs do not ring. In this case, theorderwire point-to-multipoint group callchanges to a point-to-point call betweentwo NEs.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call should be the same for allthe nodes on the same subnet.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call must have the samelength as the telephone number of theorderwire phone (phone 1) at the localsite.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwirephone number of the local station. Anaddressing call refers to a point-to-pointcall.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that you set the phonenumber to a three-digit number.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs in a sequential orderaccording to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.

AvailableOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the available portfor the orderwire phone.

SelectedOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the selected portfor the orderwire phone.

A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.


Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced tab.

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones


OrderwireOccupied Bytes

E1E2

E1 l This parameter specifies the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwiresignals.

l Regardless the parameter value, the radiolink always uses a customized overheadbyte to transmit the orderwire signals.Hence, this parameter should be setaccording to the occupied SDH overheadbytes in the ordinary SDH.



A-241

A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.


Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.


Available DataChannel

- - l This parameter indicates the available F1data channel.

l Two data channels should be selected forthe configuration.

No. - - This parameter indicates the number of theF1 data port.

Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port isselected, this parameter corresponds tothe F1 byte in the SDH frame at the lineport.

l If an IF port is selected, this parametercorresponds to the customized F1 byte inthe microwave frame at the IF port.

l If F1 is selected, this parametercorresponds to the F1/S1 interface on theSCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board.The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64kbit/s.

Data Channel 2

A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.


Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for Broadcast Data PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 toSERIAL4

SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electricalline, the preset overhead byte is used totransmit the asynchronous data services.

l In the case of a radio link, a customizedserial overhead byte in the microwaveframe is used to transmit theasynchronous data services.

Broadcast DataSource

- No Data l When this parameter is set to theSERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on thecorresponding SCC, Cross-Connect andClock Board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDHoptical/electrical line port, the value ofOverhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,the customized Serial byte in themicrowave frame of this port is used.

AvailableBroadcast DataSink

- - This parameter indicates the availablebroadcast data sink.

Selected BroadcastData Sink

- - l When this parameter is set to theSERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on thecorresponding SCC, Cross-Connect andClock Board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDHoptical/electrical line port, the value ofOverhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,the customized Serial byte in themicrowave frame of this port is used.

A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

Navigation PathSelect the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interfacefrom the Function Tree.



A-243

Parameters for the Basic AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operationobject.

Relay ControlMode

Auto ControlManual Control

Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, thealarming relay is started upautomatically. Otherwise, the alarmingrelay is shut down.

l Manual Control: Relay Status in MajorAlarm(K0) and Relay Status in CriticalAlarm(K1) need to be set.

Relay Status inMajor Alarm(K0)

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status ofthe relay is set manually for major alarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" statusfor major alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"status for major alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when RelayControl Mode is set to ManualControl.

Relay Status inCritical Alarm(K1)

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status ofthe relay is set manually for criticalalarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the enabledstatus for critical alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabledstatus for critical alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when RelayControl Mode is set to ManualControl.

Parameters for the Input RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the channel.

Using Status UnusedUsed

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarminterface of the input relay is used.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/High LevelRelay Turns On/Low Level

Relay Turns Off/High Level

l If this parameter is set to Relay TurnsOff/High Level, an alarm is generatedwhen the relay is turned off.

l If this parameter is set to Relay TurnsOn/Low Level, an alarm is generatedwhen the relay is turned on.

l This parameter is valid only when UsingStatus is set to Used.

Alarm Severity Critical AlarmMajor AlarmMinor AlarmWarning Alarm

Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of thealarm that is generated at the input relay.

Parameters for the Output RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Output Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the output channel.

Use or Not UnusedUsed

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarminterface of the output relay is used.

Parameters for the Temperature AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description


TemperatureUpper Threshold(Deg.C)

-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the uppertemperature threshold of the board. Whenthe actual temperature is higher than thepreset value, an alarm is generated.

TemperatureLower Threshold(Deg.C)

-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the lowertemperature threshold of the board. Whenthe actual temperature is lower than thepreset value, an alarm is generated.



A-245

Parameters for the Alarm RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm Severity Critical AlarmMajor AlarmMinor AlarmWarning Alarm

Critical AlarmMajor AlarmMinor AlarmWarning Alarm

This parameter indicates the severity of thealarm.

Alarm OutputChannel

CSK-1CSK-2CSK-3CSK-4

CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of theoutput alarm relay.

A.14 Parameters for Board InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.

A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment RecordsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS TestThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)test.

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.

A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment InformationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information ofthe ODU.

A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of theODU.

A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)function.

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.

A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.


Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the IF Attributes tab.

Parameters


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF interface.

Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies theID of a radio link. As the identifier of aradio link, this parameter is used toprevent incorrect connections of radiolinks between sites.

l Each radio link of an NE should have aunique link ID, and the link IDs at bothends of a radio link should be the same.



A-247


Received RadioLink ID

1 to 4094 - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio Link IDdoes not match the preset value of RadioLink ID at the local end, the local endinserts the AIS signal to the downstreamdirection of the service. At the same time,the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,indicating that the link IDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status of the IF interface.

l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is cancelled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the IF signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.

l Outloop indicates that the received SDHsignals are looped back.

l Generally, this parameter is used to locatethe faults that occur at each IF interface.The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. Ifthis function is enabled, the services at therelated ports are affected. In normalcases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

2M WaysideEnable Statusa

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the radio link transmits thewayside E1 service.

l The wayside E1 service can be supportedby the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

2M Wayside InputBoarda

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies theslot in which the 2M wayside service isaccessed.

l This parameter can be set only when 2MWayside Enable Status is set toEnabled.

l The wayside E1 service can be supportedby the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


350 MHzConsecutive WaveStatus

StopStart

Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies thestatus of transmitting the 350 MHz carriersignals at the IF interface.

l This parameter can be set to Start in thecommissioning process only. In normalcases, this parameter is set to Stop.Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

XPIC Enabledb EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the XPIC function of the IFX2board is enabled.

l If the IFX2 board does not perform theXPIC function, this parameter should beset to Disabled. In this case, the XPICcable is required to perform self-loop forthe XPIC port on the IFX2 board.

Enable IEEE-1588Timeslotc

EnabledDisabled

Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected withthe packet radio equipment, this parametershould be set to Enabled. Otherwise, thisparameter should be set to Disabled.

NOTE

l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.

l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.

l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.


Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF interface.



A-249


ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dBhigher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold at the receiveend, the receiver notifies the transmitterto decrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is 2dB higher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold.






l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.


-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



EnabledDisabled




ATPC UpperAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates that theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholds.

l This parameter is valid only when ATPCAutomatic Threshold Enable Status isset to Enabled.

ATPC LowerAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- -

A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then chooseConfiguration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF port.

IF ChannelBandwidth

7M14M28M56M

7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates thechannel spacing of the corresponding radiolink. This parameter is set according to theplanning information.



A-251


AM Enable Status DisableEnable

Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, theradio link uses only the specifiedmodulation scheme. In this case, youneed to select Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode.

l When this parameter is set to Enable, theradio link uses the correspondingmodulation scheme according to thechannel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services andprovide bandwidth adaptively for theEthernet services when the AM function isenabled.

Modulation Modeof the GuaranteedAM Capacity


QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by theservice transmission bandwidth that theHybrid radio must ensure and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enable.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity




This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enable.

ManuallySpecifiedModulation Mode


QPSK This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disable.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



- - l When AM Enable Status is set toEnable, this parameter depends on IFChannel Bandwidth and ModulationMode of the Guaranteed AMCapacity and is not configurable.

l When AM Enable Status is set toDisable, this parameter depends on IFChannel Bandwidth and ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode and is notconfigurable.

E1 Capacity - - This parameter specifies the number of E1services that can be transmitted in theHybrid work mode. The value of thisparameter cannot exceed the GuaranteedE1 Capacity.The E1 Capacity must be set to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment RecordsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation Path

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.

Parameters


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for theATPC adjustment.

Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of theATPC adjustment event.

Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of theATPC adjustment.

AdjustmentDirection

- - This parameter indicates the direction of theadjustment at the port.

Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switchingoperation at the port.

TransmittedPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the transmittedpower of the port to be switched.



A-253


Received Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the received powerof the port to be switched.

A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS TestThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)test.

Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for thePRBS test.

Direction CrossTributary

Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies thedirection of the PRBS test.

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS testis performed to check the connectivity ofthe cable from the tributary board to theDDF.

l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBStest is performed to check the processingof the service from the tributary board tothe NE at the remote end.

Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies theduration of the PRBS test.

Measured Time s10minh

s This parameter indicates or specifies thetime unit used for the PRBS test.

Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of thePRBS test.

Progress - - This parameter indicates the progresspercentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of biterrors that occur in the PRBS test.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


AccumulatingMode

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifies whether to displaythe values in accumulative mode. IfAccumulating Mode is selected, itindicates that the values are displayed inaccumulative mode.

A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio FrequencyAttribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

Navigation Pathl Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU

Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.


Board - - This parameter indicates the correspondingODU.

TransmitFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the central frequency of the channel.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the minimumtransmit frequency supported by theODU and a half of the channel spacing,and must not be more than the differencebetween the maximum transmitfrequency supported by the ODU and ahalf of the channel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies at both ends of a radio linkshould be one T/R spacing.




A-255


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thespacing between the transmit frequencyand receive frequency of the ODU toprevent mutual interference of thetransmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. If theODU is a Tx low station, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, this parameter is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.


l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

Actual TransmitFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmitfrequency of the ODU.

Actual ReceiveFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivefrequency of the ODU.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/Rspacing of the ODU.

The Range offrequency Point(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the working rangeof the frequency of the ODU.

A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.


Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Power Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)








Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmitpower of the ODU. This parametercannot be set to a value that exceeds thenominal power rang of the ODU or avalue that exceeds Maximum TransmitPower(dBm).






A-257


Power to BeReceived(dBm)

- - l This parameter is used to set the expectedreceive power of the ODU and is mainlyused in the antenna alignment stage. Afterthis parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.




TX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem separately records the durationwhen the value of the actual transmitpower of the ODU is greater than thepreset value of TX High Threshold(dBm) and the duration when the valueof the actual transmit power of the ODUis greater than the preset value of TX LowThreshold(dBm) in the performanceevents.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX Low Threshold(dBm) andis lower than the preset value of TX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records theduration when the value of the actualtransmit power of the ODU is greater thanthe preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is lower than the preset valueof TX Low Threshold(dBm), the systemdoes not record it.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


TX Low Threshold(dBm)

- - l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX LowThreshold(dBm) are valid only when theATPC function is enabled.



A-259


RX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is lower than the preset value ofRX Low Threshold(dBm), the systemrecords the duration when the value of theactual receive power of the ODU is lowerthan the preset value of RX LowThreshold(dBm) and duration when thevalue of the actual transmit power of theODU is lower than the preset value of RXHigh Threshold(dBm)in theperformance events.

l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is greater than the preset valueof RX Low Threshold(dBm) and islower than the preset value of RX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records theduration when the value of the actualreceive power of the ODU is Lower thanthe preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual receive power ofthe ODU is greater than the preset valueof RX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem does not record it.

Actual TransmitPower(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actualtransmit power of the ODU.

l If the ATPC function is enabled, thequeried actual transmit power may bedifferent from the preset value.

Actual ReceivedPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivepower of the ODU.

Actual range ofPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of theactual transmit power of the ODU.

Equip InformationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Station Type Tx LowTx High

- l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.




Standard PowerOutputHigh Power Output

- This parameter indicates the level of theoutput power of the ODU.

A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_EquipmentInformation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information ofthe ODU.


Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Equipment Information tab.




Equipment Type PDHSDH

- l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing ofthe ODU.



A-261


IntermediateFrequencyBandwidth (MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the IF frequencybandwidth of the ODU.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.



- - This parameter indicates the level of theoutput power of the ODU.

Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingtime of the ODU.


A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of theODU.


Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


RF Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status of the RF interface of theODU.

l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is canceled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the RF signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.

l This function is used for fault locating forthe RF interfaces. The RF Loopbackfunction is used for diagnosis and mayaffect the services that are transmittedover the interfaces. Hence, exerciseprecaution before starting this function.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set toNon-Loopback.

ConfigureTransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work butcan normally receive microwave signals.

l If this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally transmit and receivemicrowave signals.


ActualTransmissionStatus

unmutemute

- This parameter indicates the actual transmitstatus of the ODU.

FactoryInformation

- - This parameter indicates the manufacturerinformation about the ODU.

A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.


Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.



A-263


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingSDH interface.

Optical InterfaceNamea

- - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the optical interface.

Laser Switcha OpenClose

Open l This parameter indicates or specifies theon/off state of the laser.

l This parameter is set for SDH opticalinterfaces only.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set toOpen.

Optical(Electrical)InterfaceLoopbacka

Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status on the SDH interface.


l Inloop indicates that the SDH signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.


l This function is used for fault locating forthe SDH interfaces. The Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbackfunction is used for diagnosis and mayaffect the services that are transmittedover the interfaces. Hence, exerciseprecaution before starting this function.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


VC4 Loopbackb Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status in the VC-4 path.


l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.

l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4signals are looped back.

l This function is used for fault locating forthe VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopbackfunction is used for diagnosis and mayaffect the services that are transmittedover the interfaces. Hence, exerciseprecaution before starting this function.


NOTE

l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.

l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser ShutdownThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)function.

Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.


Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the correspondingoptical interface.



A-265


AutomaticShutdown

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the Automatic LaserShutdown function is enabled ordisabled for the laser.

l The ALS function allows the laser to shutdown automatically when an optical portdoes not carry services, an optical fiber isbroken, or no optical signal is received.

l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period(ms), and Continuously On-test Period(ms) only when this parameter is set toEnabled.

On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when a shutdown laser automaticallystarts up and tests whether the optical fiberis normal.

Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when the laser does not work (withthe ALS function being enabled).

Continuously On-test Period(ms)

2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when a shutdown laser is manuallystarted up and tests whether the optical fiberis normal.

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.


Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

l Select By Board/Port(Channel).

l Select Port from the list box.

Parameters



Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


TributaryLoopback


Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status in the associated path ofthe tributary unit.


l Inloop indicates that the PDH signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.

l Outloop indicates that the received PDHsignals are looped back.

l This function is used for fault locating forthe paths of the tributary unit. TheTributary Loopback function is used fordiagnosis and may affect the services thatare transmitted over the interfaces.Hence, exercise precaution beforestarting this function.


Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of apath, which depends on the tributary unit.

Service LoadIndication

LoadNon-Loaded

Load l This parameter indicates or specifies theservice loading status in a specific path.

l When this parameter is set to Load, theboard detects whether alarms exist in thepath.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Loaded, the board does not detectwhether there are alarms in the path.

l If a path does not carry any services, youcan set this parameter to Non-Loaded forthe path to mask all the alarms. If a pathcarries services, you need to set thisparameter to Load for the path.



A-267


Retiming Mode NormalRetiming Mode ofTributary ClockRetiming Mode ofCross-ConnectClock

Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies theretiming mode of a specific path.

l By using the retiming function, theretiming reference signal from the SDHnetwork and the service data signal arecombined and then sent to the clientequipment, thus decreasing the outputjitter in the signal. In this way, theretiming function ensures that the servicecode flow can normally transfer theretiming reference signal.

l When this parameter is set to Normal, theretiming function is not used.

l When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Tributary Clock, the retimingfunction is used with the clock of theupstream tributary unit traced.

l When this parameter is set to theretiming function is used with the clockof the upstream tributary unit traced.,the retiming function is used with theclock of the cross-connect unit traced.

l It is recommended that the external clock,instead of the retiming function, shouldbe used to provide reference clock signalsfor the equipment.

l If the retiming function is required, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto Retiming Mode of Cross-connectClock.

Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of servicesthat are processed in a path. It depends onthe services that are transmitted in a path.

A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the General Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port name.

Name - - This parameter specifiesthe port name.

Enable Port EnabledDisabled

Enabled This parameter indicatesthe working mode of theport.

Encapsulation Type Null802.1QQinQ

- l This parameterspecifies the method ofthe port to process thereceived packets.

l If you set thisparameter to Null, theport transparentlytransmits the receivedpackets.

l If you set thisparameter to 802.1Q,the port identifies thepackets that complywith the IEEE 802.1qstandard.

l If you set thisparameter to QinQ, theport identifies thepackets that complywith the IEEE 802.1adQinQ standard.



A-269


Working Mode Auto-Negotiation10M Half-Duplex10M Full-Duplex100M Half-Duplex100M Full-Duplex1000M Full-Duplex

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports ofdifferent types supportdifferent workingmodes.

l When the equipment onthe opposite side worksin auto-negotiationmode, set the workingmode of the equipmenton the local side toAuto-Negotiation.

l When the equipment onthe opposite side worksin full-duplex mode, setthe working mode ofthe equipment on thelocal side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000MFull-Duplexdepending on the portrate of the equipmenton the opposite side.

l When the equipment onthe opposite side worksin half-duplex mode,set the working modeof the equipment on thelocal side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation dependingon the port rate of theequipment on theopposite side.

l The GE opticalinterface supports the1000M full-duplexmode only.

Max Frame Length(byte)

1518 to 9600 1522 The value of thisparameter should begreater than the length ofany frame to betransported.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Auto-NegotiationEnable

Auto-Negotiation

10M Half-Duplex

10M Full-Duplex

100M Half-Duplex

100M Full-Duplex

1000M Full-Duplex

100M Full-Duplex l This parameterspecifies the auto-negotiation capabilityof the Ethernet port.

l This parameter is validonly when WorkingMode is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Logical Port Attribute Optical PortElectrical Port

Optical Port l This parameterspecifies the attributeof the logical port.

l The SFP on the EM6Fboard supports theoptical port andelectrical port.

Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe attribute of thephysical port.

A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Flow Control tab.





A-271


Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter is validonly when WorkingMode is not set toAuto-Negotiation.

l The non-autonegotiation flowcontrol mode of theequipment on the localside must be consistentwith the non-autonegotiation flowcontrol mode of theequipment on theopposite side

Auto-Negotiation FlowControl Mode

DisabledEnable Symmetric FlowControl

Disabled l This parameter is validonly when WorkingMode is set to Auto-Negotiation.

l The auto-negotiationflow control mode ofthe equipment on thelocal side must beconsistent with theauto-negotiation flowcontrol mode of theequipment on theopposite side

A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.







Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameterspecifies the QinQ typedomain.

l When EncapsulationType in the GeneralAttributes tab page isset to QinQ, you needto set QinQ TypeDomain. The defaultvalue is 88A8.

l When EncapsulationType in the GeneralAttributes tab page isset to Null or 802.1Q,you cannot set QinQType Domain. In thiscase, QinQ TypeDomain is displayed asFFFF and cannot bechanged.

l QinQ Type Domainshould be set to thesame value for all theports on the EM6T/EM6F boardor theEM4T/EM4F logicalboard.



A-273


TAG Tag AwareAccessHybrid

Tag Aware l This parameterspecifies the TAG flagof a port. For detailsabout the TAG flagsand associated frame-processing methods,see Table A-1.

l If all the accessedservices are frameswith the VLAN tag(tagged frames), thisparameter is set to TagAware.

l If all the accessedservices are frameswithout the VLAN tag(untagged frames), thisparameter is set toAccess.

l If the accessed servicescontain tagged framesand untagged frames,this parameter is set toHybrid.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is validonly when TAG is setto Access or Hybrid.

l For details about thefunctions of thisparameter, see TableA-1.

l This parameter is setaccording to the actualsituations.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is validonly when TAG is setto Access or Hybrid.

l For details about thefunctions of thisparameter, see TableA-1.

l When the VLANpriority is required todivide streams or to beused for otherpurposes, thisparameter is setaccording to theplanning information.In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discardsthe frame.

The port receivesthe frame.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The ports add theVLAN tag, to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe and receivesthe frame.

The ports add theVLAN tag, to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe and receivesthe frame.



A-275

Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isDefault VLANID, the port stripsthe VLAN tagfrom the frameand thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is notDefault VLANID, the portdirectly transmitsthe frame.

A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_AdvancedAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.



Port PhysicalParameters

- - This parameter indicatesthe physical parameters ofthe port.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


MAC Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameterspecifies the loopbackstate at the MAC layer.When this parameter isset to Inloop, theEthernet signalstransmitted to theopposite end are loopedback.

l In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

PHY Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameterspecifies the loopbackstate at the PHY layer.When this parameter isset to Inloop, theEthernet physicalsignals transmitted tothe opposite end arelooped back.

l In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Loopback Check - - This parameter specifieswhether to enable loopdetection, which is used tocheck whether a loopexists on the port.

Loopback PortShutdown

- - This parameter specifieswhether to enable the loopport shutdown function.

Egress PIR Bandwidth(kbit/s)

- - This parameter specifiesthe egress PIR bandwidth.

Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression

DisabledEnabled

Disabled This parameter specifieswhether to limit the trafficrate of the broadcastpackets according to theproportion of thebroadcast packets in thetotal packets. When theequipment at the oppositeend may encounter abroadcast storm, thisparameter is set toEnabled.



A-277


Broadcast PacketSuppression Threshold

0 to 100 30 When the proportion ofthe broadcast packets inthe total packets exceedsthe value of thisparameter, the receivedbroadcast packets arediscarded. The value ofthis parameter should bemore than the proportionof the broadcast packets inthe total packets beforethe broadcast stormoccurs. In normal cases,this parameter is set to30% or higher.

A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_BasicAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwaveinterfaces.


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.



Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thecustomized port name.

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working modeof the Ethernet name.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


EncapsulationType

Null802.1QQinQ

802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method ofthe port to process the received packets.

l If this parameter is set to Null, the porttransparently transmits the receivedpackets.

l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the portidentifies the packets that comply withthe IEEE 802.1Q standard.

l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the portidentifies the packets that comply withthe IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.

A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwaveinterfaces.


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters for Layer 2 AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description


QinQ TypeDomain

- - l This parameter specifies the QinQ typedomain.

l This parameter can be set only whenEncapsulation Type in GeneralAttributes is set to QinQ.



A-279


Tag Tag AwareAccessHybrid

Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag ofa port. For details about the TAG flagsand associated frame-processingmethods, see Table A-2.

l If all the accessed services are frames thatcontain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),set this parameter to "Tag Aware".

l If all the accessed services are frames thatdo not contain the VLAN tag (untaggedframes), set this parameter to "Access".

l If the accessed services contain taggedframes and untagged frames, set thisparameter to "Hybrid".

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of thisparameter, see Table A-2.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the actual situations.

VLAN Priority 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0 l This parameter is valid only when TAGis set to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of thisparameter, see Table A-2.

l When the VLAN priority is required todivide streams or to be used for otherpurposes, this parameter needs to be setaccording to the planning information. Innormal cases, it is recommended that youuse the default value.

Table A-2 Data frame processing

Status Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discardsthe frame.

The port receivesthe frame.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Status Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The port receivesthe frame after theVLAN tag thatcorresponds to"Default VLAN ID"and "VLANPriority" are addedto the frame.

The port receivesthe frame after theVLAN tag thatcorresponds to"Default VLAN ID"and "VLANPriority" are addedto the frame.

Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is"Default VLANID", the portstrips the VLANtag from theframe and thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is not"Default VLANID", the portdirectly transmitsthe frame.

A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_AdvancedAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwaveinterfaces.


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters for Advanced AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-281


Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of theradio link. As the identifier of a radio link,this parameter is used to prevent incorrectconnections of radio links between sites.

l The ID of each radio link of an NE mustbe unique, and the link IDs at both endsof a radio link must be the same.

Received RadioLink ID

- - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio Link IDdoes not match with the preset value ofRadio Link ID at the local end, the localend inserts the AIS signal to thedownstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports analarm to the NMS, indicating that the linkIDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status of the IF interface.


l Inloop indicates that the IF signalstransmitted to the opposite end are loopedback.


l Generally, this parameter is used to locatethe faults that occur at each IF interface.The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. Ifthis function is enabled, the services at therelated ports are affected. In normalcases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Composite PortLoopback


Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status on the compositeinterface.


l Inloop indicates that the compositesignals transmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the receivedcomposite signals are looped back.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


Error FrameDiscard Enabled

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to discard the Ethernet framewhen a CRC error occurs in an Ethernetframe.

l If the Ethernet service transmitted on theIF_ETH port is a voice service or a videoservice, you can set this parameter toDisabled.

l The IF1 board does not support thisparameter.

MAC Address - - l This parameter indicates the MACaddress of the port.


Transmitting Rate(Kbit/s)

- - l This parameter indicates the transmit rateof the local port.


Receiving Rate(Kbit/s)

- - l This parameter indicates the receive rateof the local port.


MAC Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopbackstate at the MAC layer. When thisparameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernetsignals transmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou use the default value.


PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does notsupport the setting of this parameter.

A.15 Parameters for OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads(RSOHs).

A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs



A-283

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).

A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads(RSOHs).

Navigation Path1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead

Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format


Display in TextFormat

SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter specifies the display in thetext format.

Display inHexadecimal

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifies the display in thehexadecimal format.



Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

J0 to be Sent([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theJ0_MM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the J0 byte to be received at theopposite end.

J0 to be Received([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to bereceived.

l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J0byte.






Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Navigation Path1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.


Parameters for Setting the Display Format



SelectedDeselected



SelectedDeselected


Parameters for the Trace Byte J1



J1 to be Sent([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theLP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, thisparameter is set according to the J1 byte tobe received at the opposite end.

J1 to be Received([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J1byte.


Parameters for the Signal Flag C2



C2 to be Sent - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the opposite end reports theHP_SLM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the C2 byte to be received at theopposite end.

C2 to be Received - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the local end reports theHP_SLM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the C2 byte to be sent at theopposite end.



A-285

Parameters for Overhead TerminationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


VC4 OverheadTermination

TerminationPass-ThroughAuto

Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,the NE forwards the original overheadafter monitoring the VC-4 path overheadregardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Termination,the NE generates the new VC-4 pathoverhead according to the board settingafter monitoring the VC-4 path overheadregardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4path overhead in the VC-4 pass-throughservice is passed through, and the VC-4path overhead in the VC-12 service isterminated.

l It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue.



Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the FunctionTree.


Parameters for Setting the Display FormatParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SelectedDeselected



SelectedDeselected





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Parameters for the Trace ByteParameter Value Range Default Value Description


J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theHP_TIM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the J2 byte to be received bythe NE at the opposite end.

J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J2byte.


J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that isactually received.

Parameters for the Signal FlagParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Signal Label(L1,L2,L3 of V5) tobe Sent

- - If the NE at the opposite end reports theLP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, thisparameter is set according to the V5 byte tobe received at the opposite end.

Signal Label(L1,L2,L3 of V5) tobe Received

- - If the NE at the local end reports theLP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, thisparameter is set according to the V5 byte tobe sent at the opposite end.

Signal Label(L1,L2,L3 of V5)Received

- - This parameter displays the V5 byte that isactually received.



A-287

B Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards

Board Loopback Type Remarks

SL1D l Supports the opticalinterface inloop

l Supports the opticalinterface outloop

l Supports the VC-4 pathinloop

l Supports the VC-4 pathoutloop

The SL1D boards described inthis topic include the physicalSL1D board and the logicalSL1D board that the physicalCSTA/CSHC board maps.

SP3S and SP3D l Supports the tributaryinloop

l Supports the tributaryoutloop

The SP3S and SP3D boardsdescribed in this topic includethe physical SP3S and SP3Dboards and the logical SP3S andSP3D boards that the physicalCSTA, CSHA, CHSB, andCHSC boards map.

EM4T and EM4FEM6T and EM6F

l Supports the Ethernet portinloop at the MAC layer

l Supports the Ethernet portinloop at the PHY layer

The EM4T/EM4F is the logicalEthernet board mapping thephysical Ethernet board CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

IF1 l Supports the IF port inloop

l Supports the IF port outloop

l Supports the composite portinloop

l Supports the composite portoutloop

-

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types


B-1

Board Loopback Type Remarks

IFU2 l Supports the IF port inloop




l Supports the MAC inloop atIFETH ports

-

IFX2 l Supports the IF port inloop




l Supports the MAC inloop atIFETH ports

-

B Board Loopback TypesOptiX RTN 910


B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

C Indicators, Weight, and PowerConsumption of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA














OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards


C-1














Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB









C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 910


C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)















Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC











C-3




























Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1























C-5







Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2

















Issue 03 (2010-01-30)














Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F






l There is no power supplied to the board.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.



C-7



PROG On for 100 ms (green) and offfor 100 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the software is being loaded tothe flash memory.

On for 300 ms (green) and offfor 300 ms repeatedly

When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the board software is in BIOSboot state.

On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.

On for 100 ms (red) and off for100 ms repeatedly


On (red) When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the memory self-check fails orloading the upper layer software fails.When the board is running, the logic file orupper layer software is lost.The pluggable storage card is faulty.



Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving ortransmitting data.



Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving ortransmitting data.


NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE optical interfaces.




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D











LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1D reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1D does not report theR_LOS alarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SL1D reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SL1D does not reportthe R_LOS alarm.

Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D






C-9









Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX











Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators


PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.


Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators


FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards

Boards Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)

CSTA 1.08 kg < 13.6 W

CSHA 1.11 kg < 18.0 W

CSHB 1.16 kg < 22.7 W

CSHC 1.13 kg < 19.6 W

IF1 0.72 kg < 12 W

IFU2 0.79 kg < 23 W

IFX2 0.80 kg < 33 W

EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W

EM6F 0.38 kg < 11.3 W

SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W

SP3S 0.54 kg < 5.7 W

SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W

PIU 0.12 kg < 0.5 W

FAN 0.20 kg < 2.3 W (room temperature)< 17 W (high temperature)



C-11

D Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

Number

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and oneprotection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end ofa radio link.

A

Adaptivemodulation

A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation modebased on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, theequipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve thetransmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. Whenthe channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiencymodulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the linkthat carries high-priority services.

Add/Dropmultiplexer

A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signalto/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.

Adjacentchannelalternatepolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (ahorizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmittwo signals.

Automatictransmit powercontrol

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmitsignal detected at the receiver.

C

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description D Glossary


D-1

Co-channeldualpolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarizationwave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the singlepolarization.

Crosspolarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarizationwaves in the CCDP.

D

DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinetand is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the powersupply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Digitalmodulation

A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, andfrequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.

Dual-polarizedantenna

An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independentradio waves orthogonally polarized.

E

Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization cancompensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequencyselective fading.

Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degradedbecause some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,decided, and regenerated.

F

Forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information tothe payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, thebit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Frequencydiversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies witha certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signaland selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impactof fading.

G

D GlossaryOptiX RTN 910


D-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Gatewaynetworkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NEapplication layer and the NM application layer.

H

Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybridradio supports the AM function.

I

Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implementsaccessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Internet GroupManagementProtocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicastgroups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacentmulticast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Intermediatefrequency

The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signaland an RF signal.

IGMPsnooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. Thisprotocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to andanalyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet betweenhosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast dataon layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

L

Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernetswitch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this dataforwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is locatedon the NE management layer of the transport network.

Linkaggregationgroup

An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together toform a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the linkaggregation group as if it were a single link.

Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from theinput of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring theintegrality of the transferred signals.

M

Multiplexsectionprotection

The function performed to provide capability for switching a signalbetween and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.



D-3

MultipleSpanning TreeProtocol

MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the RapidSpanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendmentto 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includesMSTP.

N

N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels andone protection channel.

Networkelement

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the softwarerunning on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control boardwhich manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE softwareruns on the system control Unit.

Networkmanagementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation,administration, and maintenance of a network.

Non-gatewaynetworkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layermust be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

O

Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operationengineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implementsfrequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

P

PlesiochronousDigitalHierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexesthe minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565Mbit/s rates.

Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vectoris fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of theelectromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, thiselectromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electricfield vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip ofthe electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Q

D GlossaryOptiX RTN 910


D-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. Itencapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags totravel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

R

RapidSpanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanningtree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backwardcompatible with the STP protocol.

S

Singlepolarizedantenna

An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagneticwaves.

Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by aspecific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,only receive SD is used.

Spanning TreeProtocol

An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topologyof a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.

Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.

Subnetworkconnectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replacedby a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetworkconnection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.

SynchronousDigitalHierarchy

A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, andcross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitablyadapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

U

U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It cansupport all the NE level and network level management functions, and canmanage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in aunified manner.

V

Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several networksegments or networks by using the network management software basedon the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtualLAN.



D-5

E Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

A

ADC Analog Digit Converter

AGC Automatic Gain Control

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ASK Amplitude Shift Keying

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

AU Administrative Unit

B

BER Bit Error Rate

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

BSC Base Station Controller

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CF Compact Flash card

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

OptiX RTN 910IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations


E-1

CIR Committed Information Rate

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CoS Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CVLAN Customer VLAN

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

E-LAN Ethernet-LAN

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD Frequency Diversity

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FIFO First In First Out

FLP Fast Link Pulse

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

E Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX RTN 910


E-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping

GUI Graphical User Interface

H

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3

HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure

HSB Hot Standby

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU Indoor Unit

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF Intermediate Frequency

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO International Standard Organization

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel



E-3

LAG Link Aggregation Group

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB LoopBack

LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal

LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

LPT Link State Pass Through

M

MA Maintenance Association

MAC Medium Access Control

MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MD Maintenance Domain

MDI Medium Dependent Interface

MEP Maintenance End Point

MIB Management Information Base

MP Maintenance Point

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

MTTR Mean Time To Repair

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N

NE Network Element

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O




Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance

ODU Outdoor Unit

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PIR Peak Information Rate

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

Q

QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RF Radio Frequency

RFC Request For Comment

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RMON Remote Monitoring

RNC Radio Network Controller

RS Reed-Solomon encoding

RSL Received Signal Level

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD Space Diversity



E-5

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SNC SubNetwork Connection

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio

SP Strict Priority

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STM-N SDH Transport Module -N

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

T

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TDM Time Division Multiplex

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TU Tributary Unit

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UNI User-Network Interface

V

VC Virtual Container

VC12 Virtual Container -12

VC-12 Virtual Container -12





Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




VCG Virtual Concatenation Group

VLAN Virtual LAN

VoIP Voice over IP

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WAN Wide Area Network

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC Cross-polarization Interference Cancellation



E-7

huawei optix rtn 910 radio transmission system idu hardware description

Documents